Sunteți pe pagina 1din 494

- i -

iPASOLINK 1000
CHAPTER II OPERATION
CONTENTS
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
December, 2011
DOCUMENT WARRANTY................................................................................ i
1. REFERENCE.......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document ................................................... 1-1
1.2 LCT Communication Interface.............................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Communications............................................................................... 1-1
1.2.2 Local Port Interface.......................................................................... 1-2
1.3 iPASOLINK Equipment Configuration ................................................. 1-2
2. PREPARING WebLCT ........................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Hardware Requirements........................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Software Requirements......................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Operating System Environment ........................................................... 2-1
2.3.1 Verify Internet Explorer..................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Verify TCP/IP Settings...................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software................................. 2-6
2.4.1 MicrosoftInternet Explorer 8.......................................................... 2-6
2.4.2 Mozilla Firefox Version 3.6.x......................................................... 2-9
3. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.................................................................. 3-1
3.1 General .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 System Configuration............................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 IDU with Antenna Direct Connection................................................ 3-2
3.2.2 IDU HS/ HS with Antenna Direct Connection................................... 3-2
3.2.3 IDU HS/ Hybrid SD with Antenna Direct Connection....................... 3-2
3.2.4 IDU Twin-Path FD with Antenna Direct Connection......................... 3-2
3.2.5 IDU HS SD with Antenna Direct Connection.................................... 3-2
3.2.6 The 2+0 Configuration...................................................................... 3-3
3.2.7 IDU n-Way........................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.8 1+0 XPIC with Antenna Direct Connection....................................... 3-3
3.2.9 1+1 XPIC with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection..................... 3-3
3.3 System Overview ................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Features ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 IDU Block Diagram........................................................................... 3-5
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- ii - CONTENTS
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.3.3 ODU Block Diagram......................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 3-6
3.4.1 Overview.......................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.2 Baseband Interface.......................................................................... 3-7
3.4.2.1 LAN Interfaces [MC-M/GbE-A Card] ..................................................... 3-7
3.4.2.2 E1 Interface [16E1-A Card] ................................................................... 3-7
3.4.2.3 STM-1 Interface [STM1-A Card]............................................................ 3-7
3.4.3 ODU Interface [MODEM-A Card]..................................................... 3-8
3.4.4 DCN Interface................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.4.1 LCT Interface [MC-M Card] ................................................................... 3-8
3.4.4.2 NMS Interface [TERM-M Card] ............................................................. 3-8
3.4.4.3 NE1 Interface [TERM-M Card] .............................................................. 3-8
3.4.4.4 NE2 (RS485) Interface [AUX-A Card] ................................................... 3-8
3.4.5 Other Interfaces................................................................................ 3-9
3.4.5.1 ALM/SC/CLK [MC-M Card] ................................................................... 3-9
3.4.5.2 MEM [MC-M Card] ................................................................................ 3-9
3.4.5.3 Other Features on MC-M Card.............................................................. 3-9
3.4.5.4 ALM/EOW/NE2 [AUX-A Card]............................................................... 3-9
3.4.5.5 SC [TERM-M Card] ............................................................................... 3-9
3.5 IDU and System Performances........................................................... 3-10
3.5.1 General........................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.1.1 Environmental Conditions ................................................................... 3-10
3.5.1.2 Power Consumption and Sizes ........................................................... 3-10
3.5.1.3 Others.................................................................................................. 3-10
3.5.2 IDU Performances.......................................................................... 3-11
3.5.2.1 Transmission Capacity and Channel Spacing..................................... 3-11
3.5.2.2 Interconnecting Cables........................................................................ 3-11
3.5.2.3 Power Line Requirement..................................................................... 3-11
3.5.3 Functional Overview....................................................................... 3-12
3.5.3.1 Native IP and Native TDM................................................................... 3-12
3.5.3.2 Adaptive Modulation (AMR) ................................................................ 3-12
3.5.3.3 Radio Protection Method..................................................................... 3-12
3.5.3.4 E1 Ring Protection .............................................................................. 3-12
3.5.3.5 ETH Functions..................................................................................... 3-12
3.5.3.6 XPIC (CCDP) Function........................................................................ 3-13
3.5.3.7 AMR, 1+1 and XPIC Combination....................................................... 3-13
3.5.3.8 DXC (E1 Crossconnect) Capacity....................................................... 3-13
3.5.3.9 Card Redundancy ............................................................................... 3-14
3.5.3.10 User Authentication........................................................................... 3-14
3.5.3.11 Loopback........................................................................................... 3-14
3.5.3.12 Modern TX Output Control ................................................................ 3-14
3.5.3.13 Performance Monitoring (PMON) / Metering..................................... 3-14
3.5.3.14 Multi Service Engine [MSE-A Card] .................................................. 3-15
4. NE SETUP .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Login, Logout and Exit .......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Log In to NE ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Log Out from NE .............................................................................. 4-4
4.1.3 Exit WebLCT .................................................................................... 4-5
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
CONTENTS - iii -
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.2 WebLCT Main Window .......................................................................... 4-6
4.3 Setup Software License ........................................................................ 4-9
4.3.1 Import Software License Key........................................................... 4-9
4.3.2 Radio Capacity Setting................................................................... 4-11
4.3.3 SFP Port License Setting............................................................... 4-14
4.4 User Management ................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.1 Overview........................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.1.1 Access Level ....................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.1.2 User Group.......................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.2 User Access Levels........................................................................ 4-17
4.4.3 Default User Account ..................................................................... 4-21
4.4.4 User Account.................................................................................. 4-21
4.4.4.1 Login User List .................................................................................... 4-22
4.4.4.2 User Authentication Configuration....................................................... 4-22
4.4.4.3 User Account Management................................................................. 4-26
4.4.4.4 User Group Profile Configuration ........................................................ 4-36
4.5 Security Management .......................................................................... 4-43
4.5.1 Overview........................................................................................ 4-43
4.5.2 Service Status Setting.................................................................... 4-52
4.5.2.1 SNMP.................................................................................................. 4-55
4.5.2.2 SNMP Community............................................................................... 4-57
4.5.2.3 SNMP Trap Entry ................................................................................ 4-63
4.5.2.4 NTP..................................................................................................... 4-70
4.5.2.5 NTP Server Address ........................................................................... 4-73
4.5.2.6 FTP...................................................................................................... 4-78
4.5.2.7 SFTP................................................................................................... 4-81
4.5.2.8 HTTP................................................................................................... 4-83
4.5.2.9 HTTPS................................................................................................. 4-85
4.5.3 RADIUS Setting.............................................................................. 4-87
4.6 Register NE Configuration .................................................................. 4-94
4.6.1 Easy Setup Wizard......................................................................... 4-94
4.6.1.1 Easy Setup.......................................................................................... 4-94
4.6.1.2 MODEM Setup .................................................................................. 4-106
4.6.1.3 AMR Setup........................................................................................ 4-109
4.6.1.4 Management Setup........................................................................... 4-114
4.6.1.5 TDM Setup ........................................................................................ 4-116
4.6.1.6 ETH Setup......................................................................................... 4-119
4.6.1.7 PWE Setup........................................................................................ 4-123
4.6.2 Equipment Setup.......................................................................... 4-128
4.6.2.1 Equipment Configuration................................................................... 4-129
4.6.2.2 Radio Configuration........................................................................... 4-141
4.6.2.3 AMR Configuration............................................................................ 4-146
4.6.2.4 Network Management Configuration................................................. 4-150
5. PROVISIONING...................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Set MODEM Function ............................................................................ 5-2
5.2.1 Set MODEM Ports............................................................................ 5-2
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- iv - CONTENTS
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.2.2 Set Radio Switch Parameters .......................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 Set TX Power Parameters................................................................ 5-7
5.2.3.1 ATPC Mode........................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3.2 MTPC Mode.......................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.4 Set ALM Mode................................................................................ 5-11
5.2.5 Set XPIC......................................................................................... 5-13
5.2.6 Set AMR......................................................................................... 5-15
5.3 Set ETH Function ................................................................................. 5-17
5.3.1 Overview........................................................................................ 5-17
5.3.2 Bridge Setting................................................................................. 5-20
5.3.3 ETH Port Setting............................................................................ 5-22
5.3.4 VLAN Setting.................................................................................. 5-24
5.3.4.1 VLAN List ............................................................................................ 5-24
5.3.4.2 Modify VLAN Service Name................................................................ 5-26
5.3.4.3 Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID..................................................................... 5-28
5.3.4.4 VLAN Setting....................................................................................... 5-30
5.3.5 FDB Setting.................................................................................... 5-41
5.3.5.1 FDB Setting......................................................................................... 5-41
5.3.5.2 Static Entry Setting.............................................................................. 5-47
5.3.6 ETH OAM Setting........................................................................... 5-53
5.3.6.1 OAM MEG Setting............................................................................... 5-53
5.3.6.2 OAM MEP Setting ............................................................................... 5-58
5.3.6.3 OAM MIP Setting................................................................................. 5-67
5.3.7 RSTP Setting.................................................................................. 5-75
5.3.7.1 Modify RSTP Port................................................................................ 5-75
5.3.7.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter ....................................................... 5-78
5.3.8 ERP Setting.................................................................................... 5-80
5.3.9 Link Aggregation............................................................................ 5-88
5.3.9.1 Add Link Aggregation.......................................................................... 5-88
5.3.9.2 Modify LAG Registration ..................................................................... 5-91
5.3.9.3 Delete LAG Registration...................................................................... 5-94
5.3.10 QoS/Classification Setting............................................................ 5-96
5.3.10.1 Classification Setting (Equipment Based QoS Mode) ....................... 5-97
5.3.10.2 Classification Setting (Port Based QoS Mode)................................ 5-106
5.3.10.3 Ingress Setting ................................................................................ 5-113
5.3.10.4 Port Setting Tab .............................................................................. 5-126
5.3.11 Filter Settings ............................................................................. 5-132
5.3.11.1 Filter List.......................................................................................... 5-132
5.3.11.2 Profile List........................................................................................ 5-140
5.3.11.3 Port Filter Settings........................................................................... 5-145
5.3.12 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting........................................... 5-147
5.3.13 Port Isolate Setting..................................................................... 5-149
5.3.14 LLF Setting................................................................................. 5-151
5.3.14.1 Add LLF Group................................................................................ 5-151
5.3.14.2 Modify LLF Group............................................................................ 5-153
5.3.14.3 Delete LLF Group............................................................................ 5-155
5.3.15 Broadcast Storm Control Setting................................................ 5-157
5.4 Configure Crossconnection.............................................................. 5-160
5.4.1 E1 Port Setting............................................................................. 5-160
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
CONTENTS - v -
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.4.2 STM-1 Port Setting....................................................................... 5-163
5.4.3 Cross Connect Setting................................................................. 5-169
5.4.3.1 Add Cross Connect Assignment ....................................................... 5-171
5.4.3.2 Modify (Edit) Cross Connect Assignment.......................................... 5-176
5.4.3.3 Delete Cross Connect Assignment ................................................... 5-178
5.5 Set PWE Function .............................................................................. 5-181
5.5.1 Add New PWE.............................................................................. 5-181
5.5.2 Modify PWE.................................................................................. 5-186
5.5.3 Delete PWE.................................................................................. 5-190
5.6 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization..................................... 5-192
5.6.1 Set Equipment Clock.................................................................... 5-192
5.6.2 Set EXT Clock.............................................................................. 5-196
5.7 Assign STM-1 (Through) Port for V.11/OW...................................... 5-200
5.7.1 V.11/SC Setting............................................................................ 5-200
5.7.1.1 Assign SC Channel Usage................................................................ 5-200
5.7.1.2 Set for MODEM................................................................................. 5-202
5.7.1.3 Set for STM1-A.................................................................................. 5-204
5.7.2 Assign V.11 Directional Setting.................................................... 5-207
5.7.3 Assign Orderwire Setting.............................................................. 5-209
5.7.3.1 SW GRP1 (MODEM)......................................................................... 5-209
5.7.3.2 AUX-A ............................................................................................... 5-211
5.8 Specify Relay Alarm Mappings......................................................... 5-213
5.8.1 Relay Control Setting................................................................... 5-215
5.8.2 Cluster Alarm Setting................................................................... 5-218
5.9 Configure Alarm/AIS Setting............................................................. 5-220
5.9.1 Correlation Settings...................................................................... 5-220
5.9.2 Alarm Severity Setting.................................................................. 5-222
5.9.3 AIS Setting................................................................................... 5-225
5.9.4 BER Threshold Setting................................................................. 5-227
5.9.4.1 Switch Group 1 (MODEM)................................................................. 5-227
5.9.4.2 STM1-A............................................................................................. 5-229
5.10 Assign PMON/RMON Settings ........................................................ 5-231
5.10.1 PMON Threshold Setting........................................................... 5-231
5.10.1.1 MODEM / SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab.................................................. 5-232
5.10.1.2 APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab................................................................. 5-235
5.10.1.3 16E1-A (Slot No.) Tab..................................................................... 5-241
5.10.2 PMON Other............................................................................... 5-244
5.10.3 RMON Threshold Setting........................................................... 5-246
5.10.4 RMON Other .............................................................................. 5-249
5.10.4.1 Add VLAN Counter.......................................................................... 5-249
5.10.4.2 Delete VLAN Counter...................................................................... 5-251
5.11 AUX Setting ...................................................................................... 5-253
5.11.1 AUX Input Setting....................................................................... 5-253
5.11.2 AUX Output Setting.................................................................... 5-262
6. ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS......................................................... 6-1
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- vi -/END
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
This page is intentionally left blank.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
DOCUMENT WARRANTY - i -
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
December, 2011
DOCUMENT WARRANTY
1. The information in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
2. Screenshots of WebLCT provided in this document are examples. Screenshot
samples in this document should be the latest as of issuing time, however, their
appearances may vary according to configurations, operation modes and specified
parameters of the equipment, WebLCT applications release version, etc.
3. This document is provided on the assumption that the targeted users have skills and
knowledge of restrictions and precautions to operate the equivalent equipment. Refer
to the equipment manual for details.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- ii -/END DOCUMENT WARRANTY
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
This page is intentionally left blank.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
REFERENCE 1-1
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
1. REFERENCE
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document
Following conventions are used throughout this document:
1.2 LCT Communication Interface
1.2.1 Communications
iPASOLINK 1000 provides WebLCT as the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) that is a
convenient tool to install and maintain the equipment. WebLCT uses the GUI method
on WEB browser. In addition, this tool enables a remote connection.
Since using the method of WEB browser, there is no application software to install.
However, to operate iPASOLINK via WebLCT, license keys that are prepared
according to the contract and equipment version should be installed.
Style Description Examples:
Italic Indicates a related document title/name. Refer to iPASOLINK Operation
Manual for details
Bold Menus and menu items
Indications of parameters and buttons displayed
on the user interface
Names of items in the computer display
File names and directory names
The Overall window appears.
(arrow) Indicates transition of screens and/or menu items. Select System Login/Logout.
<item > A command variable to be entered, which requires
the users choice or definition. Commonly used to
prompt the user to enter a password.
<password >
Initial Caps Indicates a keypad name using an uppercase for
its first letter.
Press Enter key.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
1-2/END REFERENCE
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
1.2.2 Local Port Interface
The LCT Port is provided on the equipment front:
Figure 1-1 LCT Port
Connect the LAN Port on PC and LCT Port on front of the equipment (MC-M Card
on the active side) using a LAN Cable. Following are the specifications of LAN Port/
Cable:
10/100BASE-TX
RJ 45
1.3 iPASOLINK Equipment Configuration
Following types of configurations are available by a single iPASOLINK 1000 IDU:
12-Way Nodal [Non-Protected (1+0)]
Protected (1+1) with hot standby, space diversity, twin path with hitless switch.
Six pairs of XPIC
Ethernet-ring
(to LCT port)
LAN CABLE
(10/100BASE-TX)
NOTE: Enabled LCT Port is on the active MC-M.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT 2-1
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
2. PREPARING WebLCT
2.1 Hardware Requirements
2.2 Software Requirements
2.3 Operating System Environment
Check if your PC satisfies the conditions below:
Internet Explorer is installed
TCP/IP Protocol is properly set.
Component For Windows XP For Windows Vista For Windows 7
CPU Pentium M 1.6 GHz Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz
RAM 512 MB or greater 1 GB or greater 1 GB or greater
HDD 40 GB or greater 40 GB or greater 40 GB or greater
Display Color LCD (1024 768) Color LCD (1024 768) Color LCD (1024 768)
LAN Port 10/100BASE-T(X) 10/100BASE-T(X) 10/100BASE-T(X)
USB Port
Item Requirement
Supported Operating System Windows XP [English Version]
Windows Vista [English Version]
Windows 7 [English Version]
Browsing Software MicrosoftInternet Explorer 8
MicrosoftInternet Explorer 7
Mozilla Firefox Version 3.6 or later
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-2 PREPARING WebLCT
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
2.3.1 Verify Internet Explorer
Confirm that the Internet Explorer is installed on the PC for WebLCT. Following are
examples of Windows XP:
Procedure 2-1 Verify Internet Explorer
Click start button, then select:
All Programs Internet Explorer [Start menu] or
Programs Internet Explorer [Classic Start menu]
Figure 2-1 Windows Start Menu
[Start menu]
[Classic Start menu]
Programs
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT 2-3
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
2.3.2 Verify TCP/IP Settings
An IP Address of the PC for WebLCT will be automatically detected at and retrieved
from DHCP Server of the NE.
Procedure 2-2 Set/Verify TCP/P Settings
Set the IP Address that is automatically retrieved:
1. Log on to the Operating System (Windows) as an Administrator.
2. From the start menu of the Windows, select Control Panel. [For the Classic
Start menu, select Settings Control Panel.] The Control Panel appears.
3. Double-click the Network Connections icon.
Figure 2-2 Windows Control Panel
The Network Connections option window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-4 PREPARING WebLCT
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Right-click on the Local Area Connection to show the pop-up menu, and select
Properties.
Figure 2-3 Network Connections Option Window
The Local Area Connection Properties option window appears.
5. Click on the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) to select, and click the Properties
button.
Figure 2-4 Local Area Connection Properties Option Window
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties option window appears.
Properties button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT 2-5
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Verify the following:
Figure 2-5 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Option Window
Obtain an IP address automatically is selected.
Obtain DNS server address automatically is selected.
7. When verified, click the OK button. The Local Area Connection Properties
option window appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.
9. Close the Network Connections option window when necessary.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-6 PREPARING WebLCT
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
2.4 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software
Following are the recommended settings for the browsing software (browsers)
available to operate LCT:
2.4.1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
Procedure 2-3 Set Tabbed Browsing Option
Tabbed Browsing option is recommended.
1. Start up the Internet Explorer 8.
2. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Internet Options.
Figure 2-6 Internet Explorer Tools Menu
The Internet Options appears.
3. On the General tab, click Settings
under Tabs option.
The Tabbed Browsing Settings
option window appears.
Figure 2-7 Internet Options General
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT 2-7
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Select Always open pop-ups in a new tab, then click the OK button.
Figure 2-8 Tabbed Browsing Settings Option Window
Proceed to Procedure 2-4.
Procedure 2-4 Set Security Options
1. Click Security tab to open the security options.
2. Click Custom level button.
Figure 2-9 Internet Options Security
Custom level button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-8 PREPARING WebLCT
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Security Settings Internet Zone option window appears.
3. Select Enable for Downloads Automatic prompting for file downloads
option.
Figure 2-10 Internet Options Security Settings Internet Zone
4. Click the OK button.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT 2-9
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
2.4.2 Mozilla Firefox Version 3.6.x
Procedure 2-5 Customize Firefox
1. Start up the Firefox 3.6.x.
2. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Options.
Figure 2-11 Firefox Tools Menu
The Options box appears.
3. Select Always ask me where to save files, then click the OK button.
Figure 2-12 Options General
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-10/END PREPARING WebLCT
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
This page is intentionally left blank.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-1
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3.1 General
iPASOLINK 1000 is the equipment designed to converge the high density nodal
applications, such as the cross-connections of 12 links, aggregation/distribution of
multiple-links ring nodes and the large capacity D/I repeater applications, etc.,
supporting the versatile transportations of both native TDM and native Ethernet
traffics, as well as the link and each transportation levels independent ring
protections.
Along with iPASOLINK 200 and iPASOLINK 400, iPASOLINK 1000 provides up
to 460 Mbps transmission capacity per radio link and advanced modulation scheme
operating in 6, 7, 8. 10, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 28, 32, 38 or 42 GHz band. Furthermore,
iPASOLINK 1000 is available to support the high-speed interfaces, such as 10GbE
and CWDM for converged mobile and fixed broadband.
The iPASOLINK 1000 consists of the antennas, Outdoor Units (ODU) and the 19-
inch 3U size Indoor Unit (IDU), owing its high performance and reliability in a small
form factor to NECs rigid TQC activities and vast experience in the wired and
wireless communication fields.
The iPASOLINK 1000 provides fourteen front accessible universal-card slots that
accommodate a wide range of interface modules satisfying various D/I and/or
topology requirements. The iPASOLINK 1000 can configure up to twelve 1+0, six
1+1 twin-path, hot standby and diversity radio link arrangements.
In addition, using NECs most advanced cross polarization interface canceling
techniques, transmission capacity of up to 920 Mbps is supported utilizing the same
radio frequency channel.
The iPASOLINK 1000 enables these without any header suppression/compression of
packet data.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.2 System Configuration
The system consists of the MDP-400MB-1BB Modulator-Demodulator [Indoor Unit
(IDU)] and TRP-( )G-1/1D Transmitter-Receiver [Outdoor Unit (ODU)], Hybrid
Combiner/Divider and the antenna.
NOTE: The Combiner/Divider is used in (1+1) single antenna configuration of the
ODU Type directly mounting the antenna.
3.2.1 IDU with Antenna Direct Connection
3.2.2 IDU HS/ HS with Antenna Direct Connection
3.2.3 IDU HS/ Hybrid SD with Antenna Direct Connection
3.2.4 IDU Twin-Path FD with Antenna Direct Connection
3.2.5 IDU HS SD with Antenna Direct Connection
I/F Cable
MD1 ODU
DATA
IN/OUT
f1
f1
ODU
I/F Cable
IDU
MD1
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
I/F Cable
MD1
ODU (Working)
DATA
IN/OUT
f1
f1
ODU (Working)
I/F Cable
IDU
MD1
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
I/F Cable
MD2 ODU (Standby)
HYB
ODU (Standby)
I/F Cable
MD2
HYB
I/F Cable
MD1
ODU (Working)
DATA
IN/OUT
f1
f1
ODU (Working)
I/F Cable
IDU
MD1
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
I/F Cable
MD2 ODU (Standby)
HYB
ODU (Standby)
I/F Cable
MD2
f1
I/F Cable
MD1
ODU (Working)
DATA
IN/OUT
f1
f1
ODU (Working)
I/F Cable
IDU
MD1
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
I/F Cable
MD2 ODU (Standby)
HYB
ODU (Standby)
I/F Cable
MD2
HYB
f2
f2
I/F Cable
MD1
ODU (Working)
DATA
IN/OUT
ODU (Working)
I/F Cable
IDU
MD1
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
I/F Cable
MD2
ODU (Standby) ODU (Standby)
I/F Cable
MD2
f1
f1
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-3
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3.2.6 The 2+0 Configuration
3.2.7 IDU n-Way
n =Up to 12
3.2.8 1+0 XPIC with Antenna Direct Connection
3.2.9 1+1 XPIC with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection
I/F Cable
MD1
ODU (Working)
DATA
IN/OUT
ODU (Working)
I/F Cable
IDU
MD1
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
I/F Cable
MD2
ODU (Standby) ODU (Standby)
I/F Cable
MD2
f1
f1
HYB
HYB
f1
f1
I/F Cable
MD1
ODU (Working)
DATA
IN/OUT
ODU (Working)
I/F Cable
IDU
IDU
DATA
IN/OUT
I/F Cable
MDn ODU (Standby) ODU (Standby)
I/F Cable
IDU
f1
f1
HYB
f1
f1
DATA
IN/OUT
n Way
I/F Cable
MD ODU
DATA
IN/OUT
ODU
I/F Cable
IDU
MD
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
I/F Cable
MD ODU ODU
I/F Cable
MD
HYB HYB
f1
f1
XI/F Cable
HYB
XI/F Cable
HYB
f1
f1
V(H) V(H)
H(V) H(V)
I/F Cable
MD ODU
DATA
IN/OUT
ODU
I/F Cable
IDU
MD
DATA
IN/OUT
IDU
MD ODU ODU
MD
HYB
HYB
f1
f1
XI/F Cable
HYB
XI/F Cable HYB
f1
f1
V(H)
V(H)
H(V) H(V)
MD ODU
I/F Cable
MD ODU
HYB
ODU
MD
ODU
I/F Cable
MD
HYB
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.3 System Overview
3.3.1 Features
ODU-IDU Separate Mounting Type using one coaxial cable only for connection.
Available to select the protection or non-protection system using common ODUs
and IDUs.
Flexible configurations for ODUs and antennas: mounting directly or remotely
for configurations of 1+0 (non redundant), 1+1 hot standby, 1+1 space diversity,
1+1 frequency diversity (Twin-Path), 1+0 XPIC, 1+1 XPIC, 2+0, and N way.
ACCP, ACAP, CCDP and configurations by merging these are available.
Compact size IDU on 19-inch rack.
Figure 3-1 IDU Appearance
Small and light-weight ODU that is easy to handle and install.
Figure 3-2 ODU Appearances
Wide temperature range operative ODU and IDU.
Nominal rating of input DC voltage: 48 V DC
13-42 GHz ODU and
0.3 m Direct-Mount Antenna
6-11 GHz ODU
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-5
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3.3.2 IDU Block Diagram
Figure 3-3 IDU Block Diagram
3.3.3 ODU Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 ODU Block Diagram
48 V
48 V
TDM Bus
Packet Bus
Control Bus
Main Card (Redundant)
CWDM
Universal
Slots
#1
MODEM
GbE
#14
16E1
STM-1
MSE
AUX
Clock
L2 SW TDM SW
Alarm
DSC
Clock
4 GbE
(SFP/RJ45)
PS
PS
TERM CPU NMS
TX first MIX
RF CKT (depends on frequency band)
DUP
TO/FROM
ANTENNA
LNA
PA
BPF MIX MIX BPF
MIX
BPF
RX I/F
TX I/F
MPX
TX: 350 MHz
RX: 140 MHz
TO/FROM
IDU
DC-DC CONV CTRL LO
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.4 Interfaces
3.4.1 Overview
Figure 3-5 IDU Interface Layout
Universal Slot #1 Universal Slot #2 Universal Slot #3 Universal Slot #4
Universal Slot #5 Universal Slot #6 Universal Slot #7 Universal Slot #8
Universal Slot #9
Universal Slot #10
MAIN CARD 1
TERM PS 1
FAN1
FAN2
Main Card Slot #2
Universal Slot #11 Universal Slot #12 Universal Slot #13 Universal Slot #14
PS Slot #2
Slot #
Slots for fundamental cards that must be mounted.
Slots for option cards, which can be left vacant.
PS Power Supply
Main Card Slot #1
Universal Card-Slots
ODU Interface (Modem)
GbE (10/100/1000BASE-X)
16 E1 TDM
STM-1 (up to 2 STM-1)
Multi Service Engine
AUX (DI - DO/ EXT ALM)
MC-M Card
USB
LCT
Ethernet (RJ45)
1, 2
Ethernet (SFP) 3, 4
Alarm,
Service Channel,
Clock
NMS
NE1
Service Channel
Power Supply 1
Power Supply 2 (redundant option)
MC-M2 (redundant option)
MC-M 1
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-7
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3.4.2 Baseband Interface
iPASOLINK 1000 supports various interfaces specified by the ITU-T standards and
IEEE standards as listed below:
3.4.2.1 LAN Interfaces [MC-M/GbE-A Card]
Four ports (two SFP Ports and two RJ 45 Ports) of LAN Interface per MC-M or GbE-
A Card are provided.
Interface: 2 1000BASE-SX/LX/CWDM [802.3]
2 10/100/1000BASE-T(X), auto/fixed
Signal Rate: 1.25 Gbps [1000BASE-SX/LX/T/CWDM]
125 Mbps [100BASE-TX]
10 Mbps [10BASE-T]
Connector: LC [1000BASE-SX/LX/CWDM]
RJ 45 [10/100/1000BASE-T(X)]
3.4.2.2 E1 Interface [16E1-A Card]
Interface: HDB-3 [G.703]
Signal Rate: 16 E1 (2.048 Mbps)
Impedance: 75 ohms or 120 ohms (selectable)
Connector: MDR68
3.4.2.3 STM-1 Interface [STM1-A Card]
STM-1 Interface Card provides two SFP interfaces. The second STM-1 Interface is
supported for APS (Automatic Protection Switching) function only.
Interface: S-1.1/L-1,1 [G.957]
STM-1e [G.703]
CWDM
Signal Rate: 1 or 2 155.52 Mbps
Connector: LC [S-1.1/L-1.1/CWDM]
DIN 1.0/2.3 [STM-1e]
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-8 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.4.3 ODU Interface [MODEM-A Card]
ODU Interface is a port connecting to/from IDU using a coaxial cable. Up to 12
connections (to 12 Universal Slots on IDU at maximum) can be added.
Connector: TNC Female
3.4.4 DCN Interface
3.4.4.1 LCT Interface [MC-M Card]
iPASOLINK provides users the GUI environment through WEB browser, the Local
Craft Terminal (WebLCT), which is a convenient tool to install and maintain
iPASOLINK. This tool supports the remote connection as well.
Type: 10/100BASE-T(X)
DHCP Server Supported
Connector: RJ 45
3.4.4.2 NMS Interface [TERM-M Card]
This port is for connection with NMS Server through the network.
Type: 10/100BASE-T(X)
Connector: RJ 45
Protocols: SNMPv1/v2c/v3, https, sftp
3.4.4.3 NE1 Interface [TERM-M Card]
The NE1 port is for a connection to/from other IDU(s).
Type: 10/100BASE-T(X)
Connector: RJ 45
3.4.4.4 NE2 (RS485) Interface [AUX-A Card]
Type: Serial signal port for legacy equipment
Connector: D-SUB 44-pin
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-9
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3.4.5 Other Interfaces
3.4.5.1 ALM/SC/CLK [MC-M Card]
Connector: one D-SUB 44-pin
Usage:
ALM: two output ports
V-11-1: one port [64 kbps async; co/contra direction selectable]
RS-232C-1: one port [9.6 kbps async]
EXT CLK IN: one port [2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbps; 75 or 120 ohms]
EXT CLK OUT: one port [2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbps; 75 or 120 ohms]
3.4.5.2 MEM [MC-M Card]
Slot Type: one USB
3.4.5.3 Other Features on MC-M Card
EOW: one Engineering Orderwire outlet
[4-wire voice channel]
CALL: one push button switch
(no designation): equipped with buzzer
3.4.5.4 ALM/EOW/NE2 [AUX-A Card]
Connector: one D-SUB 44-pin
Usage:
ALM: four alarm output ports
Housekeeping: six Control/Alarm input ports
EOW: two ports (for back-to-back connection)
CALL OUT: two ports
Buzzer IN: two ports
NE2: See 3.4.4.4 NE2 (RS485) Interface [AUX-A Card]
3.4.5.5 SC [TERM-M Card]
Connector: one D-SUB 15-pin
Usage:
V-11-2: one port [64 kbps async; co/contra direction selectable]
RS-232C-2: one port [9.6 kbps async]
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.5 IDU and System Performances
3.5.1 General
3.5.1.1 Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 5 to +50 C (ETSI EN3000 19-1-3 Class 3.1E)
Operational: 10 to +55 C
Transportation: ETSI EN300019-1-2 Class 2.3
Storage: ETSI EN300019-1-1 Class 1.2
Humidity:
Intra-Station: up to 95% (at +50 C, no condensing)
Transportation: ETSI EN300019-1-2 Class 2.3
Storage: ETSI EN300019-1-1 Class 1.2
3.5.1.2 Power Consumption and Sizes
3.5.1.3 Others
EMC: Conforms to EN301489-4
Safety: Conforms to EN60950-1
Ref.
#
OBJECT
POWER
CONSUMPTION
DIMENSIONS
[W H D] mm
WEIGHT NOTE
1
IDU
483 129 240
15 kg The weight is approximated.
7.0 kg Chassis (vacant slots)
2
MC-M
40 W

300 22 220 0.7 kg


Main Card; Class 1 Product
3 MODEM-A 10 W 100 22 220 0.4 kg ODU Interface
4 16E1-A 8 W 100 22 220 0.4 kg 16 E1 Interface
5
STM1-A
8 W

100 22 220 0.4 kg


STM-1 Interface; Class 1 Product
6
GbE-A
8 W

100 22 220 0.4 kg


4GbE [2SFP +2RJ 45]; Class 1 Product
7 MSE-A 10 W 100 22 220 0.4 kg Multi Service Engine for PWE
8 AUX-A 3 W 100 22 220 0.4 kg Auxiliary Card
9 CWDMFA 0 W 100 22 210 0.4 kg Class 1/1M Laser Product
10 CWDMFB 0 W 100 22 210 0.4 kg Class 1/1M Laser Product
11 FAN-M 6 W 30 66 220 0.6 kg FAN Unit
12 TERM-M 3 W 100 22 220 0.2 kg Term Card
13 PS-M 150 22 220 0.4 kg Power Supply
: The value does not include the power consumption of SFP.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-11
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3.5.2 IDU Performances
3.5.2.1 Transmission Capacity and Channel Spacing
3.5.2.2 Interconnecting Cables
3.5.2.3 Power Line Requirement
Input Voltage Range: 48 V DC (40.5 to 57 V DC)
[conforms to EN300 132 2]
Connector: 10-pin, 3.81 mm pitch [1-178288-8]
CHANNEL SPACING
7 MHz
14 MHz*

28 MHZ

56 MHz

TRANSMISION
CAPACITY
[Physical layer maximum
throughput 64-byte VLAN
Tagged packet size]
QPSK 14 Mbps 28 Mbps 57 Mbps 114 Mbps
16 QAM 28 Mbps 57 Mbps 114 Mbps 230 Mbps
32 QAM 35 Mbps 71 Mbps 143 Mbps 287 Mbps
64 QAM 42 Mbps 85 Mbps 172 Mbps 345 Mbps
128 QAM 49 Mbps 99 Mbps 200 Mbps 402 Mbps
256 QAM 114 Mbps 229 Mbps 460 Mbps
*
: 13.75 MHz; : 27.5 MHz; : 55 MHz; : Channel Spacing at 18 GHz band
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Connector Type TNC Female
Cable Type 8D-FB-E or equivalent
Cable Length Nominal 300 m at maximum
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-12 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.5.3 Functional Overview
3.5.3.1 Native IP and Native TDM
MODEM has both native IP and native TDM signal processing circuits.
3.5.3.2 Adaptive Modulation (AMR)
6 modulation schemes changeable: QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
3.5.3.3 Radio Protection Method
1+1 HS/HS, HS/SD, FD
HS: Hotstandby
SD: Space Diversity
FD: Frequency Diversity
3.5.3.4 E1 Ring Protection
E1 SNCP support
3.5.3.5 ETH Functions
Switching Capacity: 48 Gbps (non-blocking)
MAC Learning Table: Independent VLAN Learning (VLAN +MAC)
up to 32 k (configurable)
VLAN: 802.1Q Port Based, Tag Based, Tunnel
802.1ad Port Based, Tag Based, Selective
Up to 4064 VLANs per equipment
MEF 9 Certified EPL, EVPL and ELAN
service support with L2CP Tunneling function
Jumbo Frame: Supported (up to 9600 bytes)
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-13
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
QoS:
Ingress: MEF/RFC4115 Compliant Policing (CIR, EIR,
CBS, EBS)
QoS Classification (VLAN CoS, IPv4 DSCP,
Pv6 DSCP, MPLS EXP, ETH Port, VLAN ID)
Egress: 4/8 Class SP/D-WRR Queues
per-class rate configurable shaping
per-class configurable maximum burst length
shaping for strict priority queue
Hierarchical shaping (Port and Class)
WRED congestion avoidance and Weighted
Tail Drop
ETH OAM: 802.1ag Service OAM (CC/LB/LT), Y1731
Performance Monitoring (LM/DM)
Protection: STP/RSTP, G.8032v2 ERPS
Link Aggregation: Radio Link Aggregation, 802.1AX, 1:1 LACP
redundancy
SyncE: Supported
TDM PWE: RFC4553 SAToP (MEF8)
Other: Link Loss Forwarding
Mirroring
Broadcast Storm Control
L2 Filter
Port Isolation
3.5.3.6 XPIC (CCDP) Function
QPSK to 256QAM modulation at 14/28/56 MHz channel spacing.
3.5.3.7 AMR, 1+1 and XPIC Combination
AMR and 1+1, AMR and XPIC combinations are available.
3.5.3.8 DXC (E1 Crossconnect) Capacity
Up to 168 168 E1 non-blocking.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3.5.3.9 Card Redundancy
Power Supply [PS-M]: 1+1
Main Card [MC-M]: 1+1
3.5.3.10 User Authentication
RADIUS, local
3.5.3.11 Loopback
Far-end Baseband Loopback
Near-end Baseband Loopback
IF Loopback
3.5.3.12 Modern TX Output Control
Manual Control
Automatic Control (ATPC)
Mute Control
3.5.3.13 Performance Monitoring (PMON) / Metering
PMON Items: OFS, BBE, ES, SES, SEP and UAS
Metering Items: Output power level (TX Power)
Received signal level (AGC V)
Bit Error Rate (BER MON)
LAN Monitoring Items: RX Unicast
RX Broadcast
RX Multicast
RX Pause
RX CRC Error
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3-15
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3.5.3.14 Multi Service Engine [MSE-A Card]
This Interface Card supports TDM PWE3 (Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge).
Protocols: SAToP (RFC4553, MEF8)
Number of MSE-A to Mount: 1 at maximum
Number of E1 Paths: Up to 64
Supported Payload Size: 32 (+Padding), 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256 bytes
Jitter Buffer Size: 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 ms
Number of ACR (Adaptive Clock Recovery):
16
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-16/END SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
This page is intentionally left blank.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-1
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. NE SETUP
NOTE: Procedures here use the Microsoft Internet Explorer for the browsing
software as an example.
4.1 Login, Logout and Exit
4.1.1 Log In to NE
Users are registered by means of login names and their passwords. To protect the
network and network management system from unauthorized access or unauthorized
modifications, three levels with different privileges (refer to the table shown in
Section 4.4.2 User Access Levels) define users. The available functions to operate
depend on the users privilege level. Therefore, some of the functions may or may not
be carried out.
The highest or administrator level (Admin) has the full access to the network and
network management system.
Procedure 4-1
1. Power on the computer.
2. Log in to the Windows as the Administrator.
3. Click start, and select Programs Internet Explore. The Internet Explorer
window appears.
4. In Address field, enter an IP address of the NE with /weblct/ added as shown
below:
Example: http://172.17.254.253/weblct/
Figure 4-1 Launching Internet Explore
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-2 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Enter a user name and his/her password into User Name and Password fields:
Figure 4-2 WebLCT Login Window
Following are the default user name and its password for iPASOLINK 1000:
User Name: Admin
Password: 12345678
6. Click the OK button blow the Login fields. System Status information box
appears.
7. Click the OK button, or wait till the box automatically disappears. (The System
Status information box disappears in a while without clicking the OK button if
you wait.)
Figure 4-3 System Status Information Box
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-3
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
The main window for WebLCT appears:
Figure 4-4 WebLCT Main Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-4 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.1.2 Log Out from NE
Procedure 4-2
1. Click Logout button in the upper right of WebLCT main window.
Figure 4-5 Logout Button on WebLCT Main Window
The Confirmation dialog box appears.
2. Click the OK button to log out.
Figure 4-6 Confirmation Dialog Box
Logout button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-5
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3. The browser returns to WebLCT Login window.
Figure 4-7 WebLCT Login Window
This step ends the procedure.
4.1.3 Exit WebLCT
Following are the methods to exit WebLCT:
Select File (F) Close (X) from Internet Explorer menu bar.
Click button in the upper right of Internet Explorer.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-6 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.2 WebLCT Main Window
Following describes the contents and structure of WebLCT main window:
Figure 4-8 WebLCT Main Window Contents
(1) Logged-In User Name [Login User]
This field indicates a user name that is currently logged in.
(2) Refresh button
Click Refresh button to manually update the current status displayed in the WebLCT
main window.
(1) Logged-In User Name
(2) Refresh button
(3) Auto Mode check box
(4) Hide Equipment View check box
(5) Equipment Status View
(7) Opposite Site Links
(8) Maintenance button
(9) Logout button
(10) Menu Tree
(11) Status List
(6) ACT Operating
State
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-7
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(3) Auto Mode check box
Check (click to leave a tick in) Auto Mode check box to enable refreshing the
window automatically.
(4) Hide Equipment View check box
Check (click to leave a tick in) Hide Equipment View check box to hide the
illustrated equipment status view.
(5) Equipment Status View
This field shows the current equipment status.
(6) ACT Operating State
This field indicates the operating side of Main Card(s). MAIN 1 indicates that the
unprotected Main Card is in operation, or that the protected Main Card in Slot 1 is in
operation (active). MAIN 2 indicates that the protected Main Card in Slot 2 is in
operation (active).
(7) Opposite Site Links
This drop-down list shows a list of NEs on the opposite sites. A user can select an NE
from the list to log in to.
(8) Maintenance button
Click Maintenance tool button before starting any maintenance operations.
(9) Logout button
Click Logout button to log out from NE.
(10) Menu Tree
This part shows the menus for the equipment configuration and provisioning by a tree
view. Available operations via WebLCT are:
(a) Current Status
Current Status lists current status and event histories of the equipment by each
part of an NE (Active Alarm, Event Log, ODU, IDU, AUX).
(b) Easy Setup Wizard
Easy Setup Wizard navigates a user to set up the basic equipment configuration
including registering/removing the ODU/IDU Cards. This wizard also provides
easier steps to set up the cross-connections, VLAN service and other necessary
configurations for the new equipment.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-8 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(c) Equipment Setup
Select this menu to register or remove ODU and IDU Cards and other relevant
configurations.
(d) Provisioning
Select this menu to configure the detailed settings of IDU and ODU.
(e) Maintenance Control
Maintenance Control executes a protection switch, Loopback, Hardware Reset,
Firmware Reset, etc.
(f) Maintenance Test
Maintenance Test measures the link quality of Ethernet traffic.
(g) Current/History PMON/RMON Report
Select this menu to retrieve the Current reports or history of Performance
Monitor (PMON) and Remote Network Monitor (RMON). A user can also
exports the data to external storage (local PC, USB Memory, etc.) For more
details, refer to the Maintenance manual.
(h) Metering
Metering measures the real time TX power, RX level, ODU power supply and
BER.
(i) Equipment Utility
Select this menu to upload and download the equipment configuration data,
software, firmware and FPGA data.
(j) User Account/Security Setting
Select this menu to add, remove and modify user accounts for the equipment, and
set up the security levels for the user accounts.
(k) Inventory
Inventory retrieves the information regarding the equipment and software
license.
(11) Status List
Click a tab to select a type of status to show its logs.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-9
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.3 Setup Software License
Software License Key must be installed to operate iPASOLINK equipment via
WebLCT. Some operations, such as registering user accounts, do not require the
license. Thus, the Software License Key should be installed sometime between
logging in to WebLCT and registering/setting the equipment attributes.
4.3.1 Import Software License Key
Procedure 4-3
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select Import
License key. The Import License key window appears.
3. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-9 S/W License Setup Import License key Window
File selection window for Import License key appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-10 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Click the button, and select a target file:
Figure 4-10 Import License key Option Window
Figure 4-11 Choose File to Upload Option Window
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-12 Import License key Option Window (selected)
6. When the importing process ends, the following dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed:
Figure 4-13 Import License key Dialog Box
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-11
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.3.2 Radio Capacity Setting
Procedure 4-4
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select Radio
Capacity Setting. The Radio Capacity Setting window appears.
3. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-14 Radio Capacity Setting Window
Radio Capacity Setting option window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-12 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Select the MODEM Position from the New State drop-down list to specify the
state, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-15 Radio Capacity Setting Box
5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-16 Information Box
The Radio Capacity Setting window updates the information.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-13
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Confirm the parameters displayed.
Figure 4-17 Radio Capacity Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-14 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.3.3 SFP Port License Setting
Procedure 4-5
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select SFP
Port License Setting. The SFP Port License Setting window appears.
2. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-18 SFP Port License Setting Window
SFP Port License Setting option window appears.
3. Select the desired Slot #from the New State drop-down list, then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-19 SFP Port License Setting Box
Setup button
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-15
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-20 Information Box
5. The SFP Port License Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
parameters displayed.
Figure 4-21 SFP Port License Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-16 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.4 User Management
The user management is a function to manage an authorized user to access to a
network system, and to prevent an unauthorized user from accessing to the network
system.
4.4.1 Overview
4.4.1.1 Access Level
iPASOLINK provides three user access levels with different privilege as shown in the
table below. For details of each access level and its available operations, refer to
Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels.
NOTES:Following describes the terms, such as upload and download mentioned in
the table above:
1. Upload is to copy a file from NE to an external storage, such as WebLCT PC.
2. Download is to copy a file from an external storage to the internal storage of
equipment.
4.4.1.2 User Group
User Group configuration allows a user to manage the protocol type and access level
for each group.
A user of the specified User Group in iPASOLINK will be assigned with the pre-
defined protocol and access level of the group. In addition to the three default user
groups, up to six user groups can be added. The default user groups are shown below:
NOTE: Options specified to the default User Groups cannot be modified.
Table 4-1 Access Levels
Component Available Task File Operation SNMP Operation
Operator View the equipment configuration and
status.
Upload only Obtain
Config In addition to tasks available by
Operator level, manage radio base
band and switching function.
Upload
Download
Obtain
Set
Admin In addition to tasks available by Config
level, manage user accounts and time
adjustments.
Upload
Download
Obtain
Set
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-17
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.4.2 User Access Levels
Following shows the access level for each task. Remote means that a user makes an
access to the equipment remotely.
Meanings:
R/W: A user can both browse and modify settings.
R: A user can browse the settings.
O: The task is operational by a remote access but is restricted according to the access
level assigned to the user.
Table 4-2 User Group Profile
Group Name Classification TELNET SSH FTP HTTP SNMP Access Level
OPERATOR Unchangeable

Operator
CONFIG Unchangeable
Config
ADMIN Unchangeable

Admin
Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (1 of 4)
WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote
Easy Setup Wizard
Easy Setup R/W R R O
MODEM Setup R/W R R O
AMR Setup R/W R R O
Management Setup R/W R R O
TDM Setup R/W R R O
ETH Setup R/W R R O
PWE Setup R/W R R O
Equipment Setup
Equipment Configuration R/W R R O
Radio Configuration R/W R R O
AMR Configuration R/W R R O
Network Management
Configuration
General Setting R/W R R O
General Setting (Detail) R/W R R O
Routing Setting R/W R R O
IP Access Control Setting R/W R R O
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-18 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Provisioning
MODEM Function Setting MODEM Port Setting R/W R/W R O
Radio Switch Setting R/W R/W R O
TX Power Setting R/W R/W R O
ALM Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
XPIC Setting R/W R/W R O
AMR Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Function Setting Bridge Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Port Setting R/W R/W R O
VLAN Setting R/W R/W R O
FDB Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH OAM Setting R/W R/W R O
RSTP Setting R/W R/W R O
ERP Setting R/W R/W R O
Link Aggregation Setting R/W R/W R O
QoS/Classification Setting R/W R/W R O
Filter Setting R/W R/W R O
Port Isolate R/W R/W R O
LLF Setting R/W R/W R O
Broadcast Storm Control
Setting
R/W R/W R O
E1/STM-1/Cross-Connect
Setting
Cross Connect Setting R/W R/W R O
E1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
STM-1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
PWE Setting R/W R/W R O
Equipment Clock/
Synchronization Setting
Equipment Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
EXT Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
Relay-Alarm Mapping
Setting
Relay Control Setting R/W R/W R O
Cluster Alarm Setting R/W R/W R O
V.11/OW Setting V.11/SC Setting R/W R/W R O
V.11 Directional Setting R/W R/W R O
OW Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm/AIS Setting Correlation Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm Severity Setting R/W R/W R O
AIS Setting R/W R/W R O
BER Threshold Setting R/W R
Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (2 of 4)
WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-19
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
PMON/RMON Threshold
Setting
PMON Threshold R/W R/W R O
PMON Other R/W R/W R O
RMON Threshold R/W R/W R O
RMON Other R/W R/W R O
AUX Setting AUX Input Setting R/W R/W R O
AUX Output Setting R/W R/W R O
Maintenance Control
Loopback Control MODEM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
TDM Loopback Control
(E1 Loopback 1)
R/W R/W R O
TDM Loopback Control
(E1 Loopback 2)
R/W R/W R O
TDM Loopback Control
(STM-1 Loopback 1)
R/W R/W R O
TDM Loopback Control
(STM-1 Loopback 2)
R/W R/W R O
Protection Control MODEM TX/RX Switch
Control
R/W R/W R O
RSTP Control R/W R R O
ERP Control R/W R/W R O
LAG Revert Control R/W R/W R O
SNCP Switch Control R/W R/W R O
APS Switch Group Control R/W R/W R O
Timing Source Switch
Control
R/W R/W R O
MODEM Maintenance Control
R/W R/W R
O*
1
Laser Shutdown Control R/W R/W R O
OW Buzzer Control R/W R/W R O
H/W_F/W Reset Control H/W Reset Control R/W O
F/W Reset Control R/W O
Main Card Control Switch Over / Status
Control
R/W R/W R O
PMON/RMON/FDB Clear R/W R O
Offline Maintenance R/W R
Maintenance Test
ETH OAM LB/LT/LM/DM R/W R R O
Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (3 of 4)
WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-20 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
*1: CW Control is not editable.
Current/History PMON/RMON Report
MODEM PMON Report R R R O
E1 PMON Report R R R O
STM-1 PMON Report R R R O
ETH RMON Report R R R O
VLAN Counter Report R R R O
Metering
Current Metering R/W R/W R O
Equipment Utility
Export (NE -> Storage) Utility R/W R/W O
Update (Storage -> NE) Utility R/W R/W O
Program ROM Switching R/W O
USB Memory Utility R/W O
Log Clear Function
Shipment R/W
Date/Time Setting R/W R R O
User Account/Security Setting
Login User R O
User Authentication Management R/W R R O
User Account Management R/W O
User Group Profile Configuration R/W O
Security Management Service Status Setting R/W O
RADIUS Setting R/W R R O
Inventory
Equipment Inventory Information R R R R
S/W License Information R R R R
S/W License Setup
Import License Key R/W O
Radio Capacity Setting R/W R R O
SFP Port License Setting R/W R R O
Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (4 of 4)
WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-21
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.4.3 Default User Account
iPASOLINK provides three default user accounts with pre-defined access levels and
privileges. In addition to these default user accounts, up to nine user accounts can be
added.
Following describes the pre-defined default user accounts:
4.4.4 User Account
Following are the functions to manage user accounts supported by iPASOLINK:
Login User List
Login User List displays the information of registered user accounts. From this list,
user profiles, such as passwords and User Group Profiles can be modified.
User Authentication Configuration
User Authentication Configuration provides the authentication methods to select.
User Account Management
User Account Management is used to register new user accounts, and to modify/
delete the registered user accounts.
User Group Profile Configuration
USer Group Profile Configuration is used to register new User Groups, and to
modify/delete the registered User Groups.
Table 4-4 Default User Accounts
User Name Default Password Description User Group
User 87654321 User is able to confirm the system configuration
and equipment status, but is not able to make
any changes to the configuration.
OPERATOR
Config 87654321 In addition to the tasks available for User, Config
user is able to operate the radio management,
base band management, switching management
for C-Plane control
CONFIG
Admin 12345678 In addition to the tasks available for Config,
Admin user is able to operate database
management, file management, user
management and time adjustment for M-Plane
control.
ADMIN
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-22 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.4.4.1 Login User List
This function allows users to view and confirm the registered user accounts.
Procedure 4-6
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select Login User List. The Login User List appears.
Figure 4-22 Login User List
This step ends the procedure.
4.4.4.2 User Authentication Configuration
An authentication method for iPASOLINK can be specified using the User
Authentication Configuration.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
Authentication Setting
Determines and sets the authentication method to log in to iPASOLINK.
Privilege ID / Group Name
Assigns authority levels to the registered Group Names.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-23
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(1) Authentication Setting
Procedure 4-7
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Authentication Configuration. The User Authentication
Configuration window appears.
3. Click the Authentication Setting link.
Figure 4-23 User Authentication Configuration Window
Authentication Setting option window appears.
4. Select values, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-24 Authentication Setting Option Window
click the link
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-24 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-25 Information Dialog Box
The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 4-26 User Authentication Configuration Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-5 Authentication Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Authentication
Method
IDU Only Login authentications are proceeded only by the internal
authentication function, using the accounts and their passwords
registered to the equipment.
IDU + RADIUS If it fails at the internal authentication function, the external
authentication by RADIUS Server is proceeded. To use this
function, settings for RADIUS are required.
Authentication
Sequence
IDU -> RADIUS Server Login authentications are proceeded by the order from IDU to
RADIUS Server. This option is available when the
Authentication Method is set to IDU + RADIUS.
RADIUS Server -> IDU Login authentications are proceeded by the order from RADIUS
Server to IDU. This option is available when the Authentication
Method is set to IDU + RADIUS.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-25
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Privilege ID / Group Name
Procedure 4-8
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Authentication Configuration. The User Authentication
Configuration window appears.
3. Click a Privilege ID No. link of the target group.
Figure 4-27 User Authentication Configuration Window
Privilege ID option window for the selected ID number appears.
4. Select the method to assign, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-28 Privilege ID Option Window
Table 4-6 Setting for Privilege ID
Parameter Value Description
Group Name Operator Each group is mapped to a privilege level defined by the vendor
specific message.
Config
ADMIN
Default Permission
Privilege ID numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-26 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-29 Information Dialog Box
The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 4-30 User Authentication Configuration Window
This step ends the procedure.
4.4.4.3 User Account Management
This function allows users to add registrations of new user accounts, and to modify/
delete the registered user accounts.
NOTE: The operations regarding this function are available by the Admin-level
user(s) only.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-27
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Add User Account
This function is used to register a new user account.
NOTE: In addition to the three default accounts, up to nine user accounts can be
added.
Modify User Account
This function is used to modify the information of registered user accounts including
their password and User Group.
Delete User Account
This function is used to remove registered user accounts.
(1) Add User Accounts
NOTE: Security Level (Hash Algorithm / Priv (Privacy) Algorithm) is required to be
set to add new user accounts. Once a registration of a user is completed,
the security level of this user cannot be modified.
Procedure 4-9
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Account Management. The User Account Management window
appears.
3. Click Add User tool button.
Figure 4-31 User Account Management Window
The User Setting option window appears.
Add User button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-28 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Enter the appropriate value to each parameter for the user to be added.
Figure 4-32 User Setting Option Window
i) Enter a User Name within one to 31 characters long.
ii) Click Set Password tool button on the tool bar to open the Set Password option
window, enter the password within eight to 31 characters long, then click the
OK button.
Figure 4-33 Set Password Option Window
iii) Select Group Name. See Table 4-2 User Group Profile for User Groups.
iv) Select Security Level:
Selecting NoAuthNoPriv has no additional settings. Go to Step 5.
Selecting AuthNoPriv enables Auth Algorithm option. Click a radio button to
select the algorithm type, and enter Auth Key. See (a) Setting Authentication
Algorithm below.
Selecting AuthPriv enables both Auth Algorithm and Priv Algorithm options.
Click radio buttons to select algorithm types, and enter Auth Key and Priv Key.
See (a) Setting Authentication Algorithm and (b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-29
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(a) Setting Authentication Algorithm
Select AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv to enable the Auth Algorithm option.
Select MD5 or SHA by clicking its radio button.
Click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
Enter the Auth Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.
Figure 4-34 Select AuthNoPriv
Verify the selection and entry.
To set Priv Algorithm, go to (b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.
To complete the procedure, go to Step 5.

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-30 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(b) Setting Privacy Algorithm
Select AuthPriv to enable the Priv Algorithm option.
Select DES or AES by clicking its radio button.
Click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
Enter the Priv Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.
Figure 4-35 Set Privacy Algorithm
Verify the selection and entry, then go to Step 5.
5. Click the OK button of the User Setting option window. The Information dialog
box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-36 Information Dialog Box
The User Account Management window updates the information.

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-31
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. Confirm the registered user account information.
Figure 4-37 User Account Management Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-7 User Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
User Name (text field) Valid value: One to 31 characters long.
Password (read only) Valid value: Eight to 31 characters long. To enter the password, click Set
Password button on the tool bar.
Group Name ADMIN Assign a Group Name for the user to be added. Refer to Table 4-2 User
Group Profile for User Group.
CONFIG
OPERATOR
GROUP
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Allows a user to log in without authentication and encryption.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting this
option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or AES.
Selecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button below.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm for
authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of
original data while transmitting, the original data will be converting the
Hash by comparing them at both ends.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for authentica-
tion and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of original data
while transmitting, less than 2
64
bits of the original data will be converting
the Hash of 160 bits by comparing it at both ends.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter the
Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key. The block
size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block encryption.
The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is 128/192/256 bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy Key, click Set Priv Key
button on the tool bar.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-32 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(2) Modify User Account
Procedure 4-10
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Account Management. The User Account Management window
appears.
3. Click on a User Name of the target user account.
Figure 4-38 User Account Management Window
The User Setting option window appears.
4. Modify the registered value(s):
To modify the password, click Set
Password button on the tool bar to
open the Set Password option
window, enter the password
within eight to 31 characters long,
and click the OK button of the Set
Password option window.
To modify the Group Name, select
an appropriate Group Name from
the Group Name drop-down list.
See Table 4-2 User Group Profile
for User Groups.
Figure 4-40 Set Password Option Window
Figure 4-39 User Setting Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-33
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click OK button of the User Setting option window.
Figure 4-41 User Setting Option Window
The Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-42 Information Dialog Box
User Account Management window updates the information.
7. Confirm the modified user account information.
Figure 4-43 User Account Management Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-34 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) Delete User Account
Procedure 4-11
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Account Management. The User Account Management window
appears.
3. Click Delete User tool button on the tool bar
Figure 4-44 User Account Management Window
The User Setting option window appears.
4. From User Name drop-down list, select a user account to be removed, and click
the OK button.
Figure 4-45 User Setting (Delete) Option Window
The Confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete User button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-35
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Confirm the user name to be removed, and click the OK button.
Figure 4-46 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-47 Information Dialog Box
The User Account Management window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the selected user account has been removed.
Figure 4-48 User Account Management Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-36 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.4.4.4 User Group Profile Configuration
This operation registers/modifies User Group Profiles. The privilege of iPASOLINK
user is the subject to change according to the user access level and protocols that are
assigned by the User Group Profile. Only the Admin level user(s) is/are available to
configure the settings.
Add User Group Profile
This operation registers a new User Group Profile adding to the default User Group
Profiles.
NOTE: In addition to the three default User Group Profiles, up to six User Group
Profiles can be registered.
Modify User Group Profile
This operation modifies the Access Level and Protocol of the registered User Group
Profile.
Delete User Group Profile
This operation deletes a registered User Group Profile.
(1) Add User Group
Procedure 4-12
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile
Configuration window appears.
3. Click Add Group tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-49 User Group Profile Configuration Window
The Group Setting option window appears.
Add Group button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-37
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-50 Group Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 4-8 User Group Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Group Name (text field) Valid value: one to 32 characters long.
FTP Allow Select to use FTP protocol for file transfer.
Deny Not to use FTP for file transfer.
SFTP Allow Select to use SFTP protocol for file transfer.
Deny Not to use SFTP for file transfer.
HTTP Allow Select to use HTTP protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use HTTP for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
HTTPS Allow Select to use HTTPS protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use HTTPS for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
SNMP Allow Select to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.
Deny Not to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.
Access Level Admin Specifies the user access level. See Table 4-3 User Access Privilege
Levels for each levels description.
Config
Operator
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-38 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-51 Information Dialog Box
The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the information of newly added User Group Profile is displayed.
Figure 4-52 User Group Profile Configuration Window
This step ends the procedure
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-39
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Modify User Group
Procedure 4-13
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile
Configuration window appears.
3. Click on a target Group Name.
Figure 4-53 User Group Profile Configuration Window
The Group Setting option window appears.
4. Modify parameters:
Figure 4-54 Group Setting Option Window
Click either Allow or Deny radio button to select a protocol.
Select the appropriate Access Level from its drop-down list.
5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-40 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-55 Information Dialog Box
The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.
7. Confirm the displayed Group Profile information.
Figure 4-56 User Group Profile Configuration Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-41
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(3) Delete User Group
NOTE: A User Group can be removed only when it has no assigned user account.
Procedure 4-14
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile
Configuration window appears.
3. Click Delete Group tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-57 User Group Profile Configuration Window
The Group Setting option window appears.
4. Select a target Group Name to be removed from the drop-down list, and click the
OK button.
Figure 4-58 Group Setting (Delete) Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete Group button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-42 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Confirm the selected Group Name, and click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-59 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-60 Information Dialog Box
The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the target group name has been removed.
Figure 4-61 User Group Profile Configuration Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-43
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5 Security Management
4.5.1 Overview
iPASOLINK supports the following protocols and security management functions:
(1) SNMPv1 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1)
SNMPv1 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network,
which is specified by the following RFCs:
iPASOLINK enables SNMPv1 to support the following functions:
GET/SET of MIB
Following are response to the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) supported by
SNMPv1.
Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,
security settings, etc., can be registered via the WebLCT.
By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use
the other than the default port, change the settings via the WebLCT.
Table 4-9 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information on TCP/IP-
based Internets (SMIv1)
RFC 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 1213 Management Information Base on Network Management of TCP/IP-
based internets: MIB-II
Table 4-10 PDU Supported by SNMPv1
Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value
in the list.
GetResponse Responds to the corresponding GetRequest and Set Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
Trap Informs the change of state and troubles (SNMPv1-Trap).
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-44 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Send Trap
iPASOLINK can send SNMPv1 trap initiatively to UDP Port 162. Except for sending
the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of one additional
destination. A user can also specify the community name and UDP Port.
User Application (Log)
iPASOLINK records the names of logged-in users in the log file.
(2) SNMPv2c (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c)
SNMPv2c is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network,
and is a revised version of SNMPv1. The differences between v1 and v2c are that the
GetBulk, the inform request, unified packet format of each PDU are added,
conforming to SMIv2 and following RFCs:
Table 4-11 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
SNMPv2c
RFC 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Transport Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3428 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-
standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-45
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
iPASOLINK enables SNMPv2c to support the following functions:
GET/SET of MIB
iPASOLINK responds to the request of the network management system.
Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,
security settings, etc., can be registered via WebLCT.
By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use
other than the default port, change the settings via WebLCT.
Send Trap
iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2 trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP port
162. Except for sending the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP
address of one additional destination. User can also specify the community name and
UDP Port.
User Application (Log)
iPASOLINK records the logged-in user name in the log file.
(3) SNMPv3 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3)
SNMPv3 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and
is the newest version of SNMP. The differences between SNMPv1/v2c and v3 are
that the user authentication, ciphered communication, and the change-packet format
are enhanced, conforming to the following RFCs for SMIv2 that define SNMPv3,
SNMPv2c:
Table 4-12 PDU Supported by SNMPv2c
Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the
list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-46 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Table 4-13 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
SNMPv3
RFC 3411 An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) Management Frameworks
RFC 3412 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3413 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Applications
RFC 3414 User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv3)
RFC 3415 View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Trans port Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-
standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-47
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
iPASOLINK provides SNMPv3 to support the following function:
GET/SET of MIB.
Response the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) corresponding to SNMPv3.
Send Trap
iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2-Trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP Port
162.
IP address of SNMP entity, security level, and user name are required to set the Trap.
Authentic method and authentic password are required when the security level is
authNoPriv or authPriv.
Encryption algorithm and encrypted password are required when the security level is
authPriv.
Security (user authentication, session management and encryption)
SNMPv3 PDU is not authenticated by the community name as v1, v2c., but by the
user name, which requires the user registrations beforehand.
User authentication is carried out when the security level of the sent SNMP request is
authNoPriv or authPriv. The cryptographic hash function of the password is
selectable between MD5 and SHA.
Ciphered communication is enabled by the user authentication when the security
level of the sent SNMP request is authPriv. The cipher algorithm is selectable
between DES and AES. For the ciphered communication, a password must be set
Table 4-14 PDU Supported by SNMPv3
Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the
list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.
Report Returns a packet if the reportableFlag is set to on.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-48 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
when registering users.
User can also specify an SNMP Engine ID for each NE, which should be 16-byte
long and unique within the network.
(4) NTP (Network Time Protocol)
This protocol synchronizes the clocks of the server and associated clients in a
network, which is specified by the following RFCs:
iPASOLINK can be set either as NTP Client or Server. Following shows the
available functions of NTP Client and Server:
As NTP Client
When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client sends a request to
obtain the current time to the pre-configured server, and then adjusts the clock
according to the replied information. Up to four NTP Severs can be registered via
WebLCT.
When the multicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client will listen to the
broadcast of the time server and then adjusts the clock according to the first received
valid broadcast and ignores the broadcasts from remaining servers if exist.
If the NTP Client receives neither a response nor broadcasts, the synchronization
among the Server and Clients cannot be accomplished, which allows to use the
current time of the equipment.
As NTP Server
When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Server, Server will respond the
current time information to the Client.
When the multicast mode is selected, the Server will broadcast the current time
information of its own periodically.
Table 4-15 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and
Analysis
RFC 2030 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 4 for IPv4, IPv6 and OS
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-49
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(5) FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
This protocol transfers a file among NEs, and specified by the following RFCs.
Using iPASOLINK as FTP Server provides the following functions:
Data Upload and Download Service
Data upload and download service are available; however the data download is
restricted, which can be operated only by a user with the appropriate privilege (refer
to 4.4.2 User Access Levels).
Files and the directories accessed via FTP protocol are predetermined as well as the
file names and types, which will be downloaded.
Session Management
Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
The default setting of TCP Port 21 to listen and transfer a file on TCP port 20 can be
changed using WebLCT. When Passive Mode is selected, the port number is selected
by the equipment automatically.
If no command is issued by the Client for ninety seconds, the current TCP session
will be disconnected automatically.
User Authentication Function
iPASOLINK supports two types of the authentications:
External RADIUS Server with internal authentication
Internal authentication only
Table 4-16 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
RFC 959 Original FTP spec.
RFC 1123 The small FTP related section extends / clarifies RFC-959
RFC 2228 FTP security extensions (vsftpd implements the small subset needed to
support TLS / SSL connections)
RFC 2389 Proposes FEAT and OPTS commands
RFC 2428 Essentially IPv6 support
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-50 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(6) SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol)
This protocol securely transfers a file among NEs, using the mechanism of SSH.
iPASOLINK uses the SFTP Server to enable the following functions:
Providing Function of Secure File Transfer
In order to establish a secure network for uploading/downloading files, SFTP
function is provided.
Data Upload/Download Service
Data upload and download service are available; however, downloading to
iPASOLINK is available only by the user(s) who is/are authorized to write data into
iPASOLINK. Only the designated directories can be accessed by SFTP. For files
such as F/W, FPGA, Configuration Data, etc., their storage path and file names are
designated as well, depending on their types.
If 90 seconds passe without any progress in the file transfer, the file transfer is
canceled.
Session Management
Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
If 90 seconds pass without any FTP commands issued from the client, the session is
terminated by the FTP Command Time Out.
SFTP uses the TCP Port #22 by default.
Changing the SSH Connection Port #requires special attention since the Port #of
SSH Connection and that of SFTP connection are the same (cannot change either one
alone).
User Authentication Function
For login requests from the external clients, either of the following authentication
process is carried out: internal +external authentication, or internal authentication
only by RADIUS Server. The external authentication will be referred to the external
authentication server. The maximum number of accesses are specified, which
includes SSH connections as well, where an access after reaching the limited number
of accesses will be denied. PAM is used for the management.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-51
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(7) HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)
HTTP is the protocol for transferring data between Web server and client (WebLCT).
The HTTP is based on the following RFC standards:
Using iPASOLINK as HTTP server enables the following functions:
WebLCT
WebLCT operation via HTTP protocol is available.
Session Management
Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the
login authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted.
The default port number of HTTP Service is 80, which can be changed using
WebLCT.
User Authentication Function
iPASOLINK supports the internal authentication only.
(8) HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL/TLS)
HTTPS is the protocol that the encryption function by SSL is added to HTTP used by
Web Servers and Clients (Web Browser, etc.) for receiving/transmitting data.
The HTTPS is specified by the following standard:
Providing Web Contents
Web contents via HTTPS is provided, where the multiple languages are supported.
Table 4-17 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
RFC 1945 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.0
RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1
Table 4-18 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
RFC 2818 HTTP over TLS
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-52 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Session Management among External Terminals
HTTPS accepts an access from the external terminal, submits the server certification
to the external terminal, carries out the process of the server authentication based on
the public-key cryptosystem, before the login authentication process. The Port #is
443 by default, which can be changed by WebLCT/CLI/SNMP. Installing Apache
1.3.x or later enables to support HTTP/1.0 and HTTP/1.1.
User Authentication Function
For login requests from the external clients, only the internal authentication is carried
out. Accesses are restricted using the user authentication (the Basic Authentication).
The external authentications are referred to the external authentication server.
4.5.2 Service Status Setting
Service Status Setting displays the status of service and protocol:
Procedure 4-15
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand Security Management under the User Account / Security Setting.
3. From the Security Management options, select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-53
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Confirm the status of each Server:
Figure 4-62 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-54 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Figure 4-63 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)
Figure 4-64 Service Status Indication
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-19 Service Status Indication
Status Description
Running Protocol/Service is enabled.
Stopped Protocol/Service is disabled.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-55
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.2.1 SNMP
Procedure 4-16
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand Security Management under the User Account / Security Setting.
3. From the Security Management options, select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.
4. Click the SNMP link:
Figure 4-65 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP)
The SNMP Setting option window appears.
5. Specify an appropriate value to each parameter.
Figure 4-66 SNMP Setting Option Window
SNMP
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-56 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
CAUTION: In order to apply the values properly, CPU must be
rebooted when UDP Port Number(s) is/are changed.
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-67 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm the displayed SNMP information.
Figure 4-68 Service Status Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-20 SNMP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
SNMPv1/v2c Enable Enables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Stopped)
SNMPv3 Enable Enables SNMPv3 (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv3 (Stopped)
UDP Port 1 to 65535 From 1 to 65535 are available for UDP Port No.
161 161 is the default UDP Port No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-57
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.2.2 SNMP Community
This operation registers, modifies, or deletes the SNMP Manager information. Only
the registered SNMP managers have the right to access the equipment. Up to ten
servers can be registered.
(1) Registration of SNMP Community
Procedure 4-17
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click a Community No. to add.
Figure 4-69 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)
The SNMP Community option window appears.
4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-70 SNMP Community Option Window
SNMP Community numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-58 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-71 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the newly added SNMP Community information is displayed.
Figure 4-72 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-21 SNMP Community Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Community Name (text field) Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value: One
to 31 characters long. A request with a different
Community Name will be rejected.
Access Level Admin Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 4-3
User Access Privilege Levels for details.
Config
Operator
Access Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specifies the valid IP address or network address of
the SNMP Manager(s).
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of SNMP Manager(s).
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-59
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Modify SNMP Community
Procedure 4-18
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click Community No. of the SNMP Community field.
Figure 4-73 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)
The SNMP Community option window appears.
4. Modify parameters:
Figure 4-74 SNMP Community Option Window (Modify)
SNMP Community numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-60 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-75 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the modified SNMP Community information is displayed.
Figure 4-76 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-22 SNMP Community Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Community Name (text field) Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value:
One to 31 characters long. A request with a different
Community Name will be rejected.
Access Level Admin Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 4-3
User Access Privilege Levels for details.
Config
Operator
Access Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specifies the valid IP address or network address of
the SNMP Manager(s).
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of SNMP Manager(s).
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-61
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(3) Delete SNMP Community
Procedure 4-19
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click Delete SNMP Community tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-77 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)
The Delete SNMP Community option window appears.
4. Select an SNMP Community No. from the drop-down list, and click the OK
button.
Figure 4-78 Delete SNMP Communication Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete SNMP Community button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-62 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button when confirmed.
Figure 4-79 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-80 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the selected SNMP Community information has been removed.
Figure 4-81 Service Status Setting Window (SNCP Community)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-63
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.2.3 SNMP Trap Entry
This option configures the SNMP Trap:
(1) SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 4-20
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.
Figure 4-82 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.
SNMP Trap Entry No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-64 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Specify the appropriate value for each parameter:
(a) SNMPv1
Figure 4-83 SNMPv1 Trap Entry Option Window
(b) SNMPv2c
Figure 4-84 SNMPv2c Trap Entry Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-65
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(c) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Trap)
Figure 4-85 SNMPv3 (Trap) Entry Option Window
(d) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Inform)
Figure 4-86 SNMPv3 (Inform) Entry Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-66 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Table 4-23 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters
Parameter Value Description
SNMP Version SNMPv1 Set SNMP Version for Trap.
SNMPv2c
SNMPv3
PDU Type Trap Available for all SNMP Versions.
Inform SNMPv1 cannot select Inform.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the destination IP Address of Trap.
UDP Port 1 to 65535 Set UDP Port of Trap. [default: 162]
Community Name (text field) Enter Community Name of the Trap within one to 31
characters long. This Community Name must be the
same on both SNMP Server and Agent.
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Allows a user to log in without authentication and
encryption.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log
in. Selecting this option enables Auth Algorithm
radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted
by DES or AES. Selecting this option enables Priv
Algorithm radio button below.
SNMP Engine ID (text field) Assign a 16 byte value to an NE, which must be
unique within the same managed network.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash
Algorithm for authentication and digital signature. In
order to detect the falsification of original data while
transmitting, the Hash is generated using the original
data, which is compared at both ends of communica-
tion path.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash
Algorithm for authentication and digital signature. In
order to detect the falsification of original data while
transmitting, the 160-bit Hash is generated using the
original data that is less than 2
64
bits which is com-
pared at both ends of communication paths.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public
key. To enter the Authentication Key, click Set Auth
Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit
encryption key. The block size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Struc-
tured block encryption. The block size is 128 bits, and
the length of the key is 128/192/256 bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy
Key, click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-67
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-87 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
newly added SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.
Figure 4-88 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
This step ends the procedure.
(2) Modify SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 4-21
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.
Figure 4-89 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
SNMP Trap Entry No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-68 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.
4. Modify parameters by referring to Table 4-23 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters:
Figure 4-90 SNMP Trap Entry Option Window
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-91 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the modified SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.
Figure 4-92 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-69
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(3) Delete SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 4-22
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click Delete SNMP Trap Entry tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-93 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
The Delete SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.
4. From the drop-down list, select the No. of SNMP Trap Entry to be removed, and
click the OK button.
Figure 4-94 Delete SNMP Trap Entry Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-95 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
SNMP Trap Entry No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-70 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-96 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
selected SNMP Trap Entry information has been removed from the display.
Figure 4-97 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
This step ends the procedure.
4.5.2.4 NTP
Procedure 4-23
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the NTP link.
Figure 4-98 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
The NTP Setting box appears.
NTP
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-71
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-99 NTP Setting Option Window
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
Table 4-24 NTP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
NTP Enable Enable/Disable the NTP Protocol on the equipment.
Disable
NTP Server Mode Multicast Specify the NTP Server mode.
Unicast
Disabled
NTP Client Mode Multicast Specify NTP Client mode.
Unicast
Disabled
Stratum 2 to 15 Set Stratum level of the NTP Time Packets. The
lowest Stratum should be received in NTP PDU plus
1.
Multicast Port Bridge1 Select a port to output the Multicast Time information.
Bridge2
NE2
Multicast Interval 16 to 131072s Select Multicast Interval. [unit: second]
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-72 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-100 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm the displayed NTP configuration.
Figure 4-101 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 4-102 Service Status Setting Window (NTP)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-73
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.2.5 NTP Server Address
This operation allows a user to register/modify/delete the NTP Server and its
information.
(1) Register NTP Server Address
Procedure 4-24
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.
Figure 4-103 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-104 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window
No. of NTP Servers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-74 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-105 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the newly added NTP Server Address information is displayed.
Figure 4-106 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-25 NTP Server Address Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of the upper NTP Server.
NTP Version 3 Specify the NTP massage version.
4
Poll Time 16 to 131072 Set the interval for polling NTP Server. [unit: second
(one hour); default: 3600 sec]
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-75
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Modify NTP Server Address
Procedure 4-25
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.
Figure 4-107 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter. Modify parameters:
Figure 4-108 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
No. of NTP Servers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-76 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-109 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the modified NTP Server Address information is displayed.
Figure 4-110 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
This step ends the procedure.
(3) Clear NTP Server Address
Procedure 4-26
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-77
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3. Click Clear NTP Server button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-111 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
The Clear NTP Server option window appears.
4. From No. drop-down list, select the number of target NTP Server Address, and
the click the OK button:
Figure 4-112 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-113 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
Clear NTP Server
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-78 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-114 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the selected NTP Server Address information has been removed.
Figure 4-115 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
This step ends the procedure.
4.5.2.6 FTP
Procedure 4-27
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-79
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3. Click the FTP link.
Figure 4-116 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)
The FTP Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-117 FTP Setting Option Window
Table 4-26 FTP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
FTP Always Enable FTP is always in service.
Service Enable Enable FTP service.
Service Disable Disable FTP service.
TCP Port (Command) 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for incoming commands).
[default: 21]
TCP Port (Data) 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for outgoing commands)
[default: 20]
MAX Session 1 to 3 Specify the maximum number of user sessions at a time
Auto Stop Enable Auto Stop disconnects a session automatically if no
operation is carried out for 90 seconds.
Disable FTP Server will not disconnect a session if a session has
no operation.
FTP
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-80 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-118 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm the displayed FTP information:
Figure 4-119 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 4-120 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-81
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.2.7 SFTP
Procedure 4-28
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the SFTP link.
Figure 4-121 Service Status Setting Window (SFTP)
SFTP Setting option window appears.
4. Specify the values, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-122 SFTP Setting Option Window
SFTP
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-82 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-123 Information Dialog Box
Service Status Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed SFTP information.
Figure 4-124 Service State Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 4-125 Service State Setting Window (SFTP)
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-27 SFTP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
SFTP Disable Disables the SFTP service.
Enable Enables the SFTP service.
Always Enable Put the SFTP always in service.
Auto Disable Enable Auto Disable disconnects a session automatically if no operation is carried
out for 90 seconds.
Disable SFTP Server will not disconnect a session if a session has no operation.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-83
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.2.8 HTTP
Procedure 4-29
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the HTTP link.
Figure 4-126 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)
The HTTP Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-127 HTTP Setting Option Window
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
Table 4-28 HTTP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
HTTP Enable (Running) Enable HTTP service.
Disable (Stopped) Disable HTTP service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of HTTP Server. [default: 80]
HTTP
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-84 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-128 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm the displayed HTTP information:
Figure 4-129 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 4-130 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-85
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.2.9 HTTPS
Procedure 4-30
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the HTTPS link.
Figure 4-131 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)
The HTTS Setting option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-132 HTTPS Setting Option Window
Table 4-29 HTTPS Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
HTTP Refer to Table 4-28 HTTP Setting Parameters.
TCP Port
HTTPS Enable Puts HTTPS Server into service.
Disable Disables HTTPS service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of HTTPS Server. [default: 443]
HTTPS
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-86 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-133 Information Dialog Box
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
6. Confirm the displayed HTTPS information:
Figure 4-134 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 4-135 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-87
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.5.3 RADIUS Setting
Following provides the settings of Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
Server.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
RADIUS Setting
Specifies the method of authentications at login.
RADIUS Server Setting
Specifies the setting values to User Service Server.
Clear RADIUS Server
Removes the specified settings of RADIUS Server.
(1) RADIUS Setting
Procedure 4-31
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the RADIUS link.
Figure 4-136 RADIUS Setting Window
RADIUS Setting option window appears.
RADIUS link
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-88 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Specify the values, then click the OK button:
Figure 4-137 RADIUS Setting Option Window
5. Information dialog box appears. Click theOK button to proceed.
Figure 4-138 Information Dialog Box
6. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 4-139 RADIUS Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-30 RADIUS Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Timeout 1 to 60 Specifies a period to expire the Accept-Request message. [unit: second[
Retry Count 0 to 5 Specifies the number of times to resend the Accept-Request messages.
Default
Permissions
Operator Specifies the privilege levels to vendor-specific messages that do not have
the authentication information.
CONFIG
ADMIN
Deny Login
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-89
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) RADIUS Server
Procedure 4-32
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the RADIUS Server No. link.
Figure 4-140 RADIUS Setting Window
RADIUS Server Setting option window for the selected Server appears.
4. Click the Set Secret Key tool button.
Figure 4-141 RADIUS Server Setting Option Window
The Set Secret Key option window appears.
RADIUS Server No. link
Set Secret Key button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-90 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Enter the password as the authentication key to RADIUS:
Figure 4-142 Set Secret Key Option Window
i) Enter a new password to New Secret Key entry field.
ii) Enter the same password to Re-Enter entry field for confirmation.
iii) Click the OK button. The Set Secret Key option window disappears.
6. In the RADIUS Server Setting option window, specify the values.
Figure 4-143 RADIUS Server Setting Option Window
7. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button.
Table 4-31 RADIUS Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address of the RADIUS Server.
Port No. 1 to 65535 Enter the number of Port connecting for authentication.
Encryption
Method
User Communication with a share key of authentication by the
external server. (RADIUS)
CHAP MD5 with a shared key of the authentication by the external
server (RADIUS).
Secret Key (read only) Indicates the authentication key to RADIUS that is specified by
the Set Secret Key option.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-91
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
8. Information dialog box appears. Click theOK button to proceed.
Figure 4-144 Information Dialog Box
9. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 4-145 RADIUS Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-92 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) Clear RADIUS Server
Procedure 4-33
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the Clear RADIUS Server tool button.
Figure 4-146 RADIUS Setting Window
Clear RADIUS Server option window appears.
4. Select the target RADIUS Server number from the No. drop-down list, then click
the OK button.
Figure 4-147 Clear RADIUS Server Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Clear RADIUS Server button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-93
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-148 Confirmation Dialog Box
6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-149 Information Dialog Box
The RADIUS Setting window updates the formation.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 4-150 RADIUS Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-94 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.6 Register NE Configuration
4.6.1 Easy Setup Wizard
The Easy Setup Wizard navigates a user to make a faster and easier way of
provisioning the equipment, which is available at initially powering on. The Easy
Setup Wizard supports the following operations:
Easy Setup
Settings of NE Name, Switch Group (System structure) and guide to other setups.
MODEM Setup
Settings for Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, and RF Frequency
regarding Radio.
AMR Setup
Settings for AMR range and E1/STM-1 mapping.
Management Setup
Settings for IP address, Subnet mask and default gateway for NE.
TDM Setup
Setting of TDM cross-connect.
ETH Setup
Settings of VLAN service.
PWE Setup
Settings of TDM PWE (SAToP) function.
4.6.1.1 Easy Setup
The Easy Setup is a wizard that navigates a user to set up the basic configurations.
For traffic cards, configuration of 1+1 Hot Standby / Twin Path, 1+0 XPIC, 1+1 Hot
Standby XPIC (Master/Slave), and 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Master/Slave) can be set
here by following the appropriate sequences.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-95
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Procedure 4-34 Set Up MC-M Card(s)
Following procedure is required where the MC-M has the redundant option.
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select Easy Setup.
The Easy Setup window appears.
3. Click Setup button.
Figure 4-151 Easy Setup Window
The Easy Setup Step1 window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-96 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Enter the equipment name, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-152 Easy Setup Step1 Window
The Easy Setup Step2 window appears.
NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-32 Easy Setup Step1 Parameter
Parameter Value/Description
Equipment Name 1 to 32 characters long.
enter equipment name
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-97
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Select MC-M to enter the card name. When installing two MC-M Cards, enter
both here.
Clicking the Auto Detect button detects the mounted cards to fill in the blank
slots automatically.
Figure 4-153 Easy Setup Step2 Window
6. Click the Next button.
The Easy Setup Step3 window appears.
Card Slot for MC-M (1)
Auto Detect button
Next button
Card Slot for MC-M (2)
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-98 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Click the Next button again.
Figure 4-154 Easy Setup Step3 Window
The Easy Setup Step4 window appears.
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-99
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
8. The Easy Setup Step4 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values of parameters, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-155 Easy Setup Step4 Window (example: 1+1 Hot Standby)
9. The Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-156 Warning Dialog Box
While in the process, Easy Setup indicator appears.
Figure 4-157 Easy Setup (Under execution...) Indicator
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-100 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
10. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.
Figure 4-158 Information Dialog Box
MODEM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.2 MODEM Setup.
This step ends the procedure.
Procedure 4-35 Set Up Interfacing Cards
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select Easy Setup.
The Easy Setup window appears.
3. Click Setup button.
Figure 4-159 Easy Setup Window
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-101
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
The Easy Setup Step1 window appears.
4. Enter the equipment name, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-160 Easy Setup Step1 Window
The Easy Setup Step2 window appears.
NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-33 Easy Setup Step1 Parameter
Parameter Value/Description
Equipment Name 1 to 32 characters long.
enter equipment name
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-102 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Enter the appropriate card name to each Card Slot, then click the Next button.
Clicking the Auto Detect button detects the mounted cards to fill in the blank
slots automatically.
Figure 4-161 Easy Setup Step2 Window
The Easy Setup Step3 window appears.
Card Slots
Auto Detect button
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-103
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Register the configuration type:
Figure 4-162 Easy Setup Step3 Window (Example: 1+1 Hot Standby)
For 1 +0 System (No Protection), uncheck (remove a tick from) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP.
For 1 +1 Hot Standby System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby from its drop-down list.
For 1 +1 Twin Path System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path from its drop-down list.
For 1 +0 XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the target
SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 XPIC from its drop-down list.
For 1 +1 Hot Standby XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box
of the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby XPIC (Master) or 1+1
Hot Standby XPIC (Slave)
For 1 +1 Twin Path XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Master) or 1+1 Hot
Standby XPIC (Slave)
Next button
Switch Group Configuration
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-104 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. When completed, click the Next button. The Easy Setup Step4 window
appears.
8. The Easy Setup Step4 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values of parameters, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-163 Easy Setup Step4 Window (example: 1+1 Hot Standby)
The Warning dialog box appears.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-105
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
9. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-164 Warning Dialog Box
While in the process, Easy Setup indicator appears.
Figure 4-165 Easy Setup (Under execution...) Indicator
10. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.
Figure 4-166 Information Dialog Box
MODEM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.2 MODEM Setup.
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-106 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.6.1.2 MODEM Setup
Procedure 4-36
Launch the MODEM Setup wizard if it is not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select MODEM
Setup. The MODEM Setup window appears.
1. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-167 MODEM Setup Step1 Window (Example: 1+0 System)
Set values
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-107
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
2. When completed, click the Next button. MODEM Setup Step2 window
appears.
Table 4-34 Detailed MODEM Setting of SW/XPIC GRP or Slot Unit Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Channel Spacing 7MHz Specify the radio channel spacing.
14MHz
28MHz
56MHz
Reference Modulation QPSK Select a reference modulation from the list.
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
Radio Mode High Capacity High System Gain can be selected when the Channel
Spacing is set to 28MHz or higher.
High System
Gain
E1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 152 Specify the number of E1 Channels for mapping. The
number of channels must not exceed the limitation of the
specified modulation.
STM-1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 2 Specify the number of STM-1 Channels for mapping.
ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] (read only) The value is automatically calculated.
TX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the frequency at output.
RX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the frequency at input.
Frame ID 1 to 32 Set the Frame ID.
TX Power Control ATPC Selects Automatic Transmitter Power Control.
MTPC Selects Manual Transmitter Power Control.
Radio Traffic
Aggregation
Not Used This option is enabled when the MODEM configures
2(1+0 System) or 1+0 XPIC system.
To assign the Radio LAG, select Radio GRP.
Up to 8 MODEMs can be assigned to one Radio GRP.
Radio GRP
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-108 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3. The MODEM Setup Step2 window indicates the modified parameters in the
blue fields. Confirm the values, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-168 MODEM Setup Step2 Window (Example: 1+0 System)
Information dialog box appears.
4. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-169 Information Dialog Box
AMR Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.3 AMR Setup.
This step ends the procedure.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-109
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.6.1.3 AMR Setup
Procedure 4-37
Launch the AMR Setup wizard if it is not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select AMR
Setup. The Easy Setup Wizard AMR Setup window appears.
1. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-170 Easy Setup Wizard AMR Setup Window
AMR Setup Step 1 window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-110 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
2. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:
Figure 4-171 AMR Setup Step1 Window (Example: 1+0 System)
Click the AMR Mode radio button to enable the options.
Select other modulations to be used during AMR operation by clicking its/their
Used radio button(s).
NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation that is
specified by the Radio Configuration.
Table 4-35 AMR Configuration
Parameter Value Description
AMR Operation AMR Mode Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.
Non Operation Disable AMR function.
AMR Range QPSK Data Transmission for 1 time is 4 values (2 bits)
16QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 16 values (4 bits)
32QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 32 values (5 bits)
64QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 64 values (6 bits)
128QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 128 values (7 bits)
256QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 256 values (8 bits)
Set values
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-111
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Setup Step2 window appears.
4. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:
Figure 4-172 AMR Setup Step2 Window (Example: 1+0 System)
Enter priorities to modulations under the E1 Mapping for the use during the
AMR operation.
For the STM-1 Through mode, select a modulation scheme to be used during
AMR operation, and enter the available radio capacity. The remaining capacity of
Ethernet Bandwidth is calculated automatically.
Table 4-36 E1 Mapping
Parameter Value Description
E1 Mapping QPSK Select following items:
E1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 152]
STM-1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 2]
ETH Bandwidth is calculated from E1 and STM-1
Mappings.
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Next button
set values
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-112 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Setup Step3 window appears.
6. The AMR Setup Step3 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-173 AMR Setup Step3 Window (Example: 1+0 System)
7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-174 Information Dialog Box
TheEasy Setup Wizard AMR Setup window updates the information.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-113
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
8. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 4-175 Easy Setup Wizard AMR Setup Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-114 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.6.1.4 Management Setup
NOTE: If Warning dialog box appears, click the Maintenance tool button on the
WebLCT tool bar, to put the service into the Maintenance Mode.
Figure 4-176 WebLCT Main Window (Maintenance Tool Button)
Procedure 4-38
Launch the Management Setup option window if it is not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select
Management Setup. The Management Setup option window appears.
1. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-177 Management Setup Option box
Maintenance button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-115
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
2. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.
3. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-178 Warning Dialog Box
The Management Setup option window updates the information.
4. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-179 Management Setup Option Window
TDM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.5 TDM Setup.
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-37 FTP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
IP Address Setting (Bridge1)
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of the NMS Port.
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the Subnet Mask of NMS Port.
Default Gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the Default Gateway IP Address.
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port to NMS Yes Use NMS Port (for root NE only).
No Not to use NMS Port.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-116 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.6.1.5 TDM Setup
Procedure 4-39
Launch the TDM Setup wizard if it is not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select TDM
Setup. The Easy Setup Wizard - TDM Setup window appears.
1. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-180 Easy Setup Wizard - TDM Setup Window
TDM Setup window appears.
2. Click the Add More XC tool button.
Figure 4-181 TDM Setup Window
The TDM Setup (TDM XC Configuration) option window appears.
Setup button
Add More XC button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-117
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3. Enter the Service Name, and specify the appropriate value to each parameter.
Figure 4-182 TDM Setup (TDM XC Configuration) Option Window
4. When completed, click the OK button. TDM Setup (TDM XC Service
Configuration List) window appears.
5. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-183 TDM Setup (TDM XC Service Configuration List) Window
Warning dialog box appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-118 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-184 Warning Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-185 Information Dialog Box
NOTE: Change E1 Port usage to enable the E1 interface.
ETH Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.6 ETH Setup.
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-119
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.6.1.6 ETH Setup
Procedure 4-40
Launch the ETH Setup wizard if it is not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select ETH
Setup. The ETH Setup E-Line Service Configuration window appears.
1. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-186 ETH Setup E-Line Service Configuration Window
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-120 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
The E-LAN Service Configuration window appears.
Table 4-38 E-Line Service Configuration Parameters
Parameter Value Description
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Specify an ID of VLAN.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter the service name of VLAN. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
Service Type EPL EPL (Ethernet Private Line) is a data service defined by
the Metro Ethernet Forum, providing a point-to-point
Ethernet connection between a pair of dedicated User-
Network Interfaces (UNIs), with a high degree of
transparency.
EPL service is specified using an E-Line service type,
with an expectation of low frame delay, frame delay
variation and frame loss ratio. EPL is implemented as a
point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC), which,
unlike Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL), does not
allow for Service Multiplexing, i.e., a dedicated UNI
(physical interface) is used to accept all service frames
and to map them to a single EVC (a.k.a. All-to-one
bundling).
Due to a high degree of transparency, EPL is often used
to provide point-to-point Transparent LAN Service (TLS),
where the Service Frames header and payload are
identical at both the source and destination UNI. EPL is
not fully transparent, as it must filter 802.3x Pause
frames.
EVPL EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) is a data service
defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum, providing a point-
to-point Ethernet connection between a pair of User-
Network Interfaces (UNIs).
EVPL service is specified using an E-Line service type,
very similar to a Ethernet Private Line (EPL) service, via a
point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC).
However, unlike EPL, EVPL allows for Service
Multiplexing, i.e., multiple EVCs or Ethernet services per
UNI.
Other difference between the EVPL and EPL is the
degree of transparency - while EPL is highly transparent,
filtering only the Pause frames, EVPL is required to either
peer or drop most of the Layer 2 Control Protocols.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-121
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
2. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-187 ETH Setup E-LAN Service Configuration
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-122 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Warning dialog box appears.
3. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-188 Warning Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
Table 4-39 E-LAN Service Configuration Parameters
Parameter Value Description
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Specify an ID of VLAN.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter the service name of VLAN. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters
long.
Service Type EP-LAN EP-LAN (Ethernet Private LAN) is a Metro Ethernet service type
defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement the multipoint-to-multipoint
Ethernet virtual connections (EVC), multiple locations can be
interconnected using an EPLAN service. However, each location
can be a member of one and only one EVC. If a given location
requires connection to a second EVC, it will require the second
UNI.
Because there is only one EVC per UNI, the EVC cannot be seen
by the customer (e.g., an 802.1p VLAN tag is invisible).
EVP-LAN EVP-LAN (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN) is a Metro Ethernet
service type defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement the multipoint-to-multipoint
Ethernet virtual connections (EVC), this service provides Metro
Ethernet with a multipoint service that can support multiple
overlapping closed-user groups. For example, a district school
system with elementary, middle, and high schools could put on of
the high schools on one EVC, all of the middle schools on a second
EVC, and all of the elementary schools on a third EVC, using
EPLAN services at each school. The district data center and
administrative offices could have EVPLAN service and be made a
member of all three EVCs without the need for three UNIs.
Because there are multiple EVCs per UNI in an EVPLAN service,
the EVCs must be visible to the customer. To do this, the service
provider expects customer traffic to have an appropriate 802.1p
VLAN tag when submitted. The network will also deliver tagged
traffic to that location so that the customer knows which EVC traffic
is arriving from.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-123
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-189 Information Dialog Box
The ETH Setup window appears.
Figure 4-190 Easy Setup Wizard ETH Setup Window
This step ends the procedure.
4.6.1.7 PWE Setup
Procedure 4-41
Launch the PWE Setup wizard if it is not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select PWE
Setup. The Easy Setup Wizard PWE Setup window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-124 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
1. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-191 Easy Setup Wizard PWE Setup Window
NOTE: MSE-A can be registered to Slot 11 only.
PWE Setup Step 1 window appears.
2. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, and click the Next button:
Figure 4-192 PWE Setup Step 1 Window
PWE Setup Step 2 window appears.
Table 4-40 PWE Configuration Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Service Name (text field) Enter the service name of PWE. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters long.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-125
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
3. Specify parameters, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-193 PWE Setup Step1 Window
4. PWE Setup Step3 window appears indicating the entered values.
Table 4-41 PWE Configuration Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Jitter buffer
2 [ms]
Select the J itter Buffer size.
e.g., 8 [ms] is for 4 ms J itter Buffer.
4 [ms]
8 [ms]
16 [ms]
32 [ms]
64 [ms]
128 [ms]
PWE Clock
Mode
ACR Sets Adaptive Clock Recovery for TDM synchronization source
clock to transmit.
NE Clock Uses NE clock for TDM synchronization source clock to transmit.
Sync E1 Uses recovered clock of E1 Port (loop timing) for TDM
synchronization source clock to transmit.
Destination
MAC Address
(entry filed)
ff.ff.ff.ff.ff.ff
Enter the MAC Address of opposing MSE-A (display to PWE Setup
window) or the Broadcast Address.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Enter the ID of VLAN.
ECID 1 to 1048575 Enter the ID of PWE.
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-126 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Check (leave a tick in) the Enable E1 CH / ETH Port Usage check box, and click
the Next button.
Figure 4-194 PWE Setup Step3 Window
6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-195 Warning Dialog Box
While in progress, the progress bar appears.
Figure 4-196 PWE Setup Progress Bar
Next button
Enable E1 CH / ETH Port Usage check box
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-127
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to
proceed.
Figure 4-197 Information Dialog Box
TheEasy Setup Wizard PWE Setup window updates the information.
8. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 4-198 Easy Setup Wizard PWE Setup Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-128 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.6.2 Equipment Setup
The Equipment Setup allows more detailed settings than those done by the Easy
Setup Wizard. Some parameters are included in the Easy Setup Wizard.
Equipment Configuration
Specifies NE Name, Switch Group.
Radio Configuration
Specifies Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, RF Frequency for Radio.
AMR Configuration
Specifies the mode type and range for AMR.
Network Management Configuration
Specifies an IP Address of each port and functions.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-129
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.6.2.1 Equipment Configuration
Procedure 4-42 For MC-M Card(s)
Following procedure is required where the MC-M has the redundant option.
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Configuration. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window
appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-199 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window
Equipment Configuration Step1 window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-130 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Enter the equipment name to Equipment Name field, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-200 Equipment Configuration Step1 Window
NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Equipment Configuration Step2 window appears.
Table 4-42 E-Line Service Configuration Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Equipment Name (text field) Enter the equipment name. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
Equipment Name
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-131
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Select to fill in a card name for each slot.
Clicking the Auto Detect button retrieves names of cards that are currently
mounted.
Figure 4-201 Equipment Configuration Step2 Window
6. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration Step3
window appears.
Auto Detect button
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-132 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Click the Next button again to proceed:
Figure 4-202 Equipment Configuration Step3 Window
Equipment Configuration Step4 window appears.
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-133
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
8. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-203 Equipment Configuration Step4 Window (example: 1+1 TP)
9. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-204 Warning Dialog Box
Easy Setup indicator appears while in progress.
Figure 4-205 Easy Setup Indicator
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-134 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
10. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.
Figure 4-206 Information Dialog Box
11. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window updates the
information. Confirm the displayed equipment configuration.
Figure 4-207 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window (example)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-135
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Procedure 4-43 For Interfacing Card(s)
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Configuration. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window
appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-208 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window
Equipment Configuration Step1 window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-136 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Enter the equipment name to Equipment Name field, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-209 Equipment Configuration Step1 Window
NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Equipment Configuration Step2 window appears.
Table 4-43 Setting of NE Name Parameter
Parameter Value Description
Equipment Name (text field) Enter the equipment name. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
Equipment Name
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-137
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Select to fill in a card name for each slot.
Clicking the Auto Detect button retrieves names of cards that are currently
mounted.
Figure 4-210 Equipment Configuration Step2 Window
6. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration Step3
window appears.
Auto Detect button
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-138 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Using drop-down lists in MODME / STM SW / XPIC GRP Configuration option
box, select the configuration type:
Figure 4-211 Equipment Configuration Step3 Window (selecting 1+1 TP)
For 1 +0 System (No Protection), uncheck (remove a tick from) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP.
For 1 +1 Hot Standby System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby from its drop-down list.
For 1 +1 Twin Path System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path from its drop-down list.
For 1 +0 XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the target
SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 XPIC from its drop-down list.
For 1 +1 Hot Standby XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box
of the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby XPIC (Master) or 1+1
Hot Standby XPIC (Slave)
For 1 +1 Twin Path XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Master) or 1+1 Hot
Standby XPIC (Slave)
Switch Groups
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-139
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
8. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration Step4
window appears.
9. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-212 Equipment Configuration Step4 Window (example: 1+1 TP)
10. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-213 Warning Dialog Box
Easy Setup indicator appears while in progress.
Figure 4-214 Easy Setup Indicator
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-140 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
11. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.
Figure 4-215 Information Dialog Box
12. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window updates the
information. Confirm the displayed equipment configuration.
Figure 4-216 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window (example)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-141
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4.6.2.2 Radio Configuration
Procedure 4-44
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Radio
Configuration. The Equipment Setup Radio Configuration window
appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-217 Equipment Setup Radio Configuration Window (example)
Radio Configuration Step1 window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-142 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Specify parameters in New Setting option box:
Figure 4-218 Radio Configuration Step 1 Window (example: 1+1 HS)
New Setting
Next button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-143
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the Next button. Radio Configuration Step2 window
appears.
Table 4-44 Detailed MODEM Setting of SW/XPIC GRP or Slot Unit Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Channel Spacing 7MHz Specify the radio channel spacing.
14MHz
28MHz
56MHz
Reference Modulation QPSK Select a reference modulation from the list.
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
Radio Mode High Capacity High System Gain can be selected when Channel
Spacing is set to 28MHz or higher.
High System
Gain
E1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 152 Specify the number of E1 Channels for mapping. The
number of channels must not exceed the limitation of the
specified modulations.
STM-1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 2 Set the STM-1 Channel to specify the frequency function.
ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] (read only) Indicates the Ethernet bandwidth value that is
automatically calculated.
TX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the RF Frequency at output.
RX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the RF Frequency at input.
Frame ID 1 to 32 Set the Frame ID.
TX Power Control ATPC Selects Automatic Transmitter Power Control
MTPC Selects Manual Transmitter Power Control.
Radio Traffic Aggregation Not Used This option is enabled when the MODEM configures
2(1+0 System) or 1+0 XPIC system.
To assign the Radio LAG, select Radio GRP.
Up to 8 MODEMs can be assigned to one Radio GRP.
Radio GRP
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-144 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-219 Radio Configuration Step2 Window (example)
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-220 Information Dialog Box
The Radio Configuration window appears again.
8. Confirm the displayed radio configuration.
This step ends the procedure.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-145
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-146 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4.6.2.3 AMR Configuration
Procedure 4-45
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select AMR
Configuration. The Equipment Setup AMR Configuration window appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-221 Equipment Setup AMR Configuration Window
AMR Configuration Step1 window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-147
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:
Figure 4-222 AMR Configuration Step1 Window
Click AMR Mode radio button to enable the options.
Select other modulations to be used during AMR operation by clicking its/their
Used radio button(s).
NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation that is
specified by the Radio Configuration.
Table 4-45 AMR Configuration
Parameter Value Description
AMR Operation AMR Mode Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.
Non Operation Disable AMR function.
AMR Range QPSK Data Transmission for 1 time is 4 values (2 bits)
16QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 16 values (4 bits)
32QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 32 values (5 bits)
64QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 64 values (6 bits)
128QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 128 values (7 bits)
256QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 256 values (8 bits)
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-148 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Configuration Step2 window
appears.
6. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:
Figure 4-223 AMR Configuration Step2 Window
Enter priorities to modulations under the E1 Mapping for the use during the
AMR operation.
For the STM-1 Through mode, select a modulation scheme to be used during
AMR operation, and enter the available radio capacity. The remaining capacity of
Ethernet Bandwidth is calculated automatically.
Table 4-46 E1 Mapping
Parameter Value Description
E1 Mapping QPSK Select following items:
E1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 152]
STM-1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 2]
ETH Bandwidth is calculated from E1 and STM-1
Mappings.
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-149
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Configuration Step3 window
appears.
8. Confirm that the fields of modified parameters change to blue, and then click the
OK button.
Figure 4-224 AMR Configuration Step3 Window
Information dialog box appears.
9. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-225 Information Dialog Box
AMR Configuration window appears.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-150 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
10. Confirm that all parameters are set.
Figure 4-226 AMR Configuration Window
This step ends the procedure.
4.6.2.4 Network Management Configuration
This menu allows a user to check and configure the network management parameters
of NEs to be managed by the network management system.
General Setting
In order to connect the iPASOLINK to NMS, execute the setting to use or not to use
the NMS Port, and assign the IP Address.
General Setting (Detail)
Setting for IP Address of each internal port (NE2, Inband Management VLAN) and
NE Branch (NMS/NE/MODEM)
Routing Setting
Configure the static route information.
IP Access Control Setting
This setting allows a user to filter IP packets on both the incoming and outgoing
interfaces. The filter can be effective on all the interfaces except Bridge, LCT Port,
NE2 Port and Inband Management VLAN.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-151
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(1) General Setting
Procedure 4-46
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select General Setting. The General Setting window appears.
4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-227 General Setting Window
General Setting option window appears.
5. Specify parameters:
Figure 4-228 General Setting Option Window
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-152 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-229 Warning Dialog Box
The General Setting option window appears again.
8. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-230 General Setting Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
Table 4-47 General Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
IP Address Setting (Bridge1)
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address of NMS Port.
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the Subnet Mask of NMS Port.
Default Gateway x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address of Default Gateway.
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port to NMS Yes Use NMS Port.
No Not to use NMS Port.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-153
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
9. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-231 Information Dialog Box
The General Setting window appears again.
10. Confirm that all the parameters are set:
Figure 4-232 General Setting Window
11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.
12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.
This step ends the procedure.
(2) General Setting (Details)
Procedure 4-47
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-154 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select General Setting (Detail). The General Setting window
appears.
4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-233 General Setting (Detail) Window
The General Setting (Detail) option window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-155
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 4-234 General Setting (Detail) Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-156 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
NE2 Port Setting
Selecting Used enables remaining options.
Inband Management VLAN Setting
Selecting Used enables remaining options.
Ethernet Port Setting
Setting Usage to Used enables the remaining options.
NE Branch Setting
i) Click the target item. The option window to set IP Address and Subnet Mask
appears.
ii) Enter the addresses, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-235 Option Window for Setting Addresses
General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.
iii) Click the Bridge No. of the target item. General Setting (Detail) (NMS) option
window appears.
iv) Select a Bridge No., and click the OK button.
Figure 4-236 General Setting (Detail) (NMS) Window
The General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-157
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
v) Verify the settings:
Figure 4-237 General Setting (Detail) Option Window
vi) When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
vii) Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-238 Information Dialog Box
The General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-158 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
NMS Port Setting / LCT Port Setting
Click the radio buttons for their usage.
Table 4-48 General Setting (Detail) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
NE2 Port Setting
NE2 Port IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address of NE2 Port when NE2 (RJ 45) Port is
used for serial connection to other PASOLINK.
NE2 Port Usage Used Use NE2 Port. Selecting this option enables other NE2 Port
Setting parameters.
Not Used Not to use NE2 Port.
NE2 Port Speed 19200 Specify the baud rate. [unit: bps]
9600
Inband Management VLAN Setting
Inband Management
VLAN Usage
Used Use the Inband Management VLAN. Selecting this option
enables other Inband Management VLAN Setting options.
Not Used Not to use the Inband Management VLAN.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Assign the VLAN ID to the Inband Management VLAN.
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the priority level to L2 Frame in 802.1q CLAN tag.
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address.
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the Subnet Mask.
Ethernet Port Setting
Usage Used Selects to use the port.
Not Used Selects not to use the port.
Auto Negotiation Enabled Set to enable or disable the Autonegotiation function.
Disabled
Speed Status (read only) Indicates the current status.
Duplex Status (read only) Indicates the current mode.
Discovery Usage Used Set to use or not to use the Ethernet connection to search
the network access machinery.
Not Used
NE Branch Setting (see NE Branch Setting in Step5.
Branch 1 Branch
to
14 Branch
Specify the Branch Number. between 1 to 14.
Default Gateway x.x.x.x Enter the address of Default Gateway.
Bridge No. (read only) Indicates the assigned Bridge No.
Bridge IP Address (read only) Indicates the Bridge IP Address.
Bridge Subnet Mask (read only) Indicates the Bridge Subnet Mask.
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port to
NMS
Yes Enables a connection to NMS.
No Disables a connections to NMS.
LCT Port Setting
Restrict LCT
Connection
Any Allows LCT connecting to both Local and Remote NEs.
Only to Local NE Allows LCT connecting only to the Local NE.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-159
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. When completed, click the OK button of the General Setting (Detail) option
window. General Setting (Detail) window updates the information.
7. Confirm that all the parameters are set.
Figure 4-239 General Setting (Detail) Window
8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit
from the Maintenance Mode.
9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-160 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) Routing Setting
This operation specifies the static route for the particular network or IP Address.
(a) Add Routing Setting
Procedure 4-48
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
4. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-240 Routing Setting Window
Routing Setting option window appears.
5. Click the Add tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-241 Routing Setting Option Window
The Routing Setting (Add) option window appears.
Setup button
Add button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-161
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask Address, and Gateway Address, then click the
OK button.
Figure 4-242 Routing Setting (Add) Option Window
The Routing Setting option window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the newly added route information is displayed, then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-243 Routing Setting Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-244 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-162 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
9. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-245 Information Dialog Box
The Routing Setting window updates the information.
10. Confirm that the newly added route information is displayed.
Figure 4-246 Routing Setting Window
11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.
12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.
This step ends the procedure.
(b) Modify Routing Setting
Procedure 4-49
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-163
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-247 Routing Setting Window
Routing Setting option window appears.
5. Click on the target IP Address to be modified.
Figure 4-248 Routing Setting Option Window
Routing Setting (Modify) option window appears.
6. Modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask and/or Gateway, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-249 Routing Setting (Modify) Option Window
The Routing Setting option window updates the information.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-164 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Confirm that modified route information, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-250 Routing Setting Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-251 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
9. Click theOK button to proceed.
Figure 4-252 Information Dialog Box
The Routing Setting window updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-165
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
10. Confirm the display for the modified route information.
Figure 4-253 Routing Setting Window
11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.
12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.
This step ends the procedure.
(c) Delete Routing Setting
Procedure 4-50
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
4. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-254 Routing Setting Window
Routing Setting option window appears.
Setup button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-166 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click Delete button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-255 Routing Setting Option Window
Routing Setting (Delete) option window appears.
6. Enter the target network address into the IP Address field, then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-256 Routing Setting (Delete) Option Window
The Routing Setting option window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the selected network address has been removed, then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-257 Routing Setting Option Window
Delete button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-167
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-258 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
9. Click theOK button to proceed.
Figure 4-259 Information Dialog Box
The Routing Setting window updates the information.
10. Confirm the display for the modified route information.
Figure 4-260 Routing Setting Window
11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.
12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-168 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(4) IP Access Control Setting
(a) Input Filter List Add Entry
Procedure 4-51
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Add Entry tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-261 IP Access Control Setting Window
The Input Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.
Input Filter List tab
Add Entry button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-169
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Specify the filter condition:
Figure 4-262 IP Access Control Setting Input Filter Entry (Add) Window
Table 4-49 Input Filter Entry (Add) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Entry No. 1 to 50 Specify the entry number.
Input Index Any Select the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
Source Subnet
Mask
x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the
incoming packets.
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol
Other Selecting Other here requires to set the Port Numbers.
Destination Port Any (Currently not supported)
1 to 65535
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-170 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-263 Information Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the newly added filter information displayed.
Figure 4-264 IP Access Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-171
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(b) Input Filter List Modify Entry
Procedure 4-52
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Entry No. of the target.
Figure 4-265 IP Access Control Setting Window
The Input Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.
Entry Number(s)
Input Filter List tab
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-172 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Specify the filter condition, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-266 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window
Table 4-50 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the
incoming packets.
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol
Other Selecting Other here requires to set the Port Numbers.
Destination Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no specific
port for the destination.
1 to 65535 Select a port for the destination.
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-173
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-267 Information Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed.
Figure 4-268 IP Address Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-174 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(c) Input Filter List Delete Entry
Procedure 4-53
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Delete Entry tool button on the tool
bar.
Figure 4-269 IP Access Control Setting Window
The Input Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears.
5. Enter the target Entry No., then click the OK button.
Figure 4-270 Input Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window
Input Filter List tab
Delete Entry button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-175
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-271 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button.
Figure 4-272 Confirmation Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.
Figure 4-273 IP Access Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-176 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(d) Input Filter List Modify Rule
Procedure 4-54
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Modify Rule tool button on the tool
bar.
Figure 4-274 IP Access Control Setting Window
The Input Filter Rule option window appears.
5. Set the filter conditions:
Figure 4-275 Input Filter Rule Option Window
Input Filter List tab
Modify Rule button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-177
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-276 Information Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed
Figure 4-277 IP Access Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-51 Input Filter Rule Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Input Filter Rule Enable Enables the configured input filters.
Disable Disables the configured input filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured
conditions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured
conditions.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-178 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(e) Forwarding Filter List Add Entry
Procedure 4-55
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Add Entry tool button on the
tool bar.
Figure 4-278 IP Access Control Window
The Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.
Forwarding Filter List tab
Add Entry button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-179
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Set the filter conditions:
Figure 4-279 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Option Window
Table 4-52 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Entry No. 1 to 50 Enter the entry number.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Output Index Any Selects the egress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address
for output packets.
Destination IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Destination IP Address to output
packets.
Destination Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP
Address for the output packets.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-180 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-280 Information Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the newly added filter information is displayed.
Figure 4-281 IP Access Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.
Selecting Other requires to set port numbers. ICMP
TCP
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Destination Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions
above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions
above.
Table 4-52 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-181
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(f) Forwarding Filter List Modify Entry
Procedure 4-56
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Entry No. of the target:
Figure 4-282 IP Access Control Setting Window
Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.
Entry Number(s)
Forwarding Filter List tab
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-182 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Modify the filter conditions:
Figure 4-283 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window
Table 4-53 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Output Index Any Selects the egress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address
for output packets.
Destination IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Destination IP Address to output
packets.
Destination Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP
Address for the output packets.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-183
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-284 Information Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm the display for the modified filter conditions.
Figure 4-285 IP Access Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.
Selecting Other requires to set port numbers. ICMP
TCP
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Destination Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Table 4-53 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-184 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(g) Forwarding Filter List Delete Entry
Procedure 4-57
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Delete Entry tool button on the
tool bar.
Figure 4-286 IP Access Control Setting Window
Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears.
5. Enter the Entry No. of the target, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-287 Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Forwarding Filter List tab
Delete Entry button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-185
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-288 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-289 Information Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.
Figure 4-290 IP Access Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-186 NE SETUP
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(h) Forwarding Filter List Modify Rule
Procedure 4-58
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Modify Rule tool button on the
tool bar.
Figure 4-291 IP Access Control Setting Window
Forwarding Filter Rule option window appears.
5. Modify the filter condition:
Figure 4-292 Forwarding Filter Rule Option Window
Forwarding Filter List tab
Modify Rule button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP 4-187
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 4-293 Information Dialog Box
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm the display for the modified filter information.
Figure 4-294 IP Access Control Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 4-54 Input Filter Rule Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Forwarding Filter
Rule
Enable Enables the configured forwarding filters.
Disable Disables the configured forwarding filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured conditions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured conditions.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-188/END NE SETUP
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
This page is intentionally left blank.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-1
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. PROVISIONING
NOTE: Procedures here use the Microsoft Internet Explorer for the browsing
software as an example.
5.1 Overview
The setup procedures provided here are for further system fundamental configuration
after the equipment setup. The setting items are listed as follows:
MODEM Function Setting
Configures the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1 threshold, etc.,
for each selected MODEM.
ETH Function Setting
Configures the Ethernet port, VLAN ETH OAM, RSTP, QOS, link loss forwarding,
etc.
E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting
Configures the E1 port, STM-1 port and cross connect.
PWE Setting
Configures the TDM PWE (SAToP) function.
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting
Sets the internal clock, external clock, and timing source.
V.11/OW Setting
Configures the user interface of iPASOLINK (V.11,RS-232C) and OW buzzer.
Alarm/AIS Setting
Sets the alarm delay, severity, color and relevant settings of AIS.
PMON/RMON Setting
Sets the threshold of PMON (except Ethernet)/ RMON (Ethernet).
AUX Setting
Configures the relevant settings of the auxiliary (AUX).
For details, refer to the relevant sections accordingly.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-2 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.2 Set MODEM Function
Users can configure the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1
threshold, etc., for each selected MODEM:
MODEM Port Setting
Specifies the port name of each MODEM.
Radio Switch Setting
Specifies the TX/RX switch priority that prevents from unnecessary switching.
TX Power Setting
Specifies the threshold of TX power and RX power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
ALM Mode Setting
Specifies the ATPC power mode and ALM mode for ODU communication failure.
XPIC Setting
Specifies the XPIC configuration.
AMR Setting
Specifies the AMR Switching condition.
5.2.1 Set MODEM Ports
Specify the Port Name to each MODEM:
Procedure 5-1
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select MODEM Port Setting. The MODEM Port Setting
window appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM to configure:
Figure 5-1 MODEM Port Setting Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-3
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
MODEM Port Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate name to the MODEM:
Figure 5-2 MODEM Port Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-3 Information Dialog Box
The MODEM Port Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm the displayed information.
Figure 5-4 MODEM Port Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-1 MODEM Port Setting Parameter
Parameter Value Description
Port Name (text field) Specify a Port Name. Valid value: one to 32 characters long.
MAC Header Compression Enable Enables to increase packet rates throughput on radio
transmission.
Disable Disables the MAC Header Compression.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-4 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.2.2 Set Radio Switch Parameters
Specify the TX/RX SW priority and TXSW locking usage, and TX SW reverse
function usage. This operation configures the following items:
TX SW Priority
Specifies the TX switch priority in transmit direction. (for Hot-Standby System only)
TX SW Lock-In Usage
Enabling this function prevents the system from causing TX switching repeatedly in
case of a cable problem between IDU and ODU.
TX SW Reverse Function Usage
This function enables to carry out the local TX switch if the opposite station detects
the TX transmit failure from the local station.
RX SW Priority
Specifies the RX switching priorities. (for Hot-Standby system and Twin-Path
system only)
Procedure 5-2
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select Radio Switch Setting. The Radio Switch Setting
window appears.
3. Click a desired SW GRP to configure:
Figure 5-5 Radio Switch Setting Window
Radio Switch Setting option window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-5
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-6 Radio Switch Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears
Table 5-2 Radio Switch Setting Parameter
Parameter Value Description
TX SW Priority No. 1 Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1
whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.
Non Priority This option sets Non-Revertive mode.
TX SW Lock-in Usage Used Enables to lock the TX SW operations. Available only when
the TX SW Priority is set to No.1. If switching operations are
carried out for more than 10 times within 10 minutes, TX will
be locked on to No. 2, which will be released after 24 hours
when No. 1 recovers or has no failure.
Not Used Disables to lock the TX SW operation.
TX SW Reverse
Function Usage
Used Enables the Reverse Function. Available only when the TX
SW Priority is set to Non Priority. If both ODUs at the local
site fail to receive signals from the opposite end, a silent
alarm is output to the opposite end to carry out the forced
switch replacing the working ODU to the standby ODY.
Not Used Disables the Reverse Function.
RX SW Priority No. 1 Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1
whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.
Non Priority This option sets Non-Revertive mode.
RX SW Condition Early
Warning
Included Early
Warning
Includes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an
automatic switch.
Excluded Early
Warning
Excludes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an
automatic switch.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-6 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-7 Information Dialog Box
The Radio Switch Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-8 Radio Switch Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-7
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.2.3 Set TX Power Parameters
Specify the thresholds of TX Power and RX Power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
5.2.3.1 ATPC Mode
Procedure 5-3
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window
appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:
Figure 5-9 TX Power Setting Window
TX Power Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-10 TX Power Setting Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-8 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-11 Information Dialog Box
The TX Power Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-12 TX Power Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-3 TX Power Setting Parameters (ATPC)
Parameter Value Description
ATPC Range (MAX)
(Range of value depends on
the ODU type.)
Sets the maximum level of ODU TX Power for
ATPC Mode. [unit: dBm]
ATPC Range (MIN) Sets the minimum level of ODU TX Power for
ATPC Mode.
MTPC TX Power Sets the threshold of RX Level for the opposite
site if it is in the MTPC mode.
RX Threshold (Range of value depends on
the modulating method.)
Set the input threshold level for when the
opposite end is in ATPC Mode.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-9
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.2.3.2 MTPC Mode
Procedure 5-4
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window
appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:
Figure 5-13 TX Power Setting Window
TX Power Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-14 TX Power Setting Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-10 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-15 Information Dialog Box
The TX Power Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-16 TX Power Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-4 TX Power Setting Parameters (MTPC)
Parameter Value Description
ATPC Range (MAX) (Not editable)
ATPC Range (MIN) (Not editable)
MTPC TX Power 5.0 to 23.0 Set the TX Power level in MTPC mode.
RX Threshold 90 to 30 Set the input threshold level for when the opposite
end is in ATPC Mode.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-11
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.2.4 Set ALM Mode
Specify the ATPC Power and ALM Mode in case IDU fails in communicating with
ODU.
Procedure 5-5
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select ALM Mode Setting. The ALM Mode Setting window
appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:
Figure 5-17 ALM Mode Setting Window
ALM Mode Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-18 ALM Mode Setting Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-12 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
NOTE: When the MTPC Mode is selected, ATPC Power Mode option is disabled.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-19 Information Dialog Box
The ALM Mode Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-20 ALM Mode Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-5 ALM Mode Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
ATPC Power Mode MAX Increases the TX Power to the maximum value.
MIN Decreases the TX Power to the minimum value.
Hold Holds the TX Power at the current value.
ODU COMM ALM Mode Mute Mutes the TX Power if IDU fails in communicating with ODU.
Hold Holds the TX Power if IDU fails in communicating with ODU.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-13
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.2.5 Set XPIC
Specify the ODU Operation against the LO REF condition.
Procedure 5-6
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select XPIC Setting. The XPIC Setting window appears.
3. Click a desired XPIC GRP No. to configure:
Figure 5-21 XPIC Setting Window
XPIC Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-22 XPIC Setting Option Window
Table 5-6 XPIC Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
XPIC Condition - Local Fail Mute Enables the Mute Control against ODU [default]
REF LO. -> Self LO. Suspends the XPIC function on MODEM, where
signals from ODU are output as they are.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-14 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-23 Information Dialog Box
The XPIC Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-24 XPIC Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-15
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.2.6 Set AMR
This procedure specifies conditions to carry out the AMR switching operation where
the AMR Mode is enabled. See 4.6.2.3 AMR Configuration for enabling AMR.
Procedure 5-7
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select AMR Setting. The AMR Setting window appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:
Figure 5-25 ALM Mode Setting Window
AMR Setting option window appears.
4. Select a condition to carry out AMR Switch operation:
Figure 5-26 AMR Setting Option Window
CNR (Carrier Noise Ratio): Automatically operates AMR If the noise within the carrier wave
increases.
RSL (Receive Signal Level): Operates AMR the receiving power changed.
Table 5-7 AMR Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
AMR Switch condition CNR + RSL Carries out AMR by CNR when the modulation scheme is
downward; or by RSL when the modulation scheme is the upward
(e.g., QPSK to 256QAM), AMR is carried out by RSL). [default]
CNR Carries out AMR by CNR.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-16 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-27 Information Dialog Box
The ALM Mode Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-28 ALM Mode Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-17
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3 Set ETH Function
5.3.1 Overview
The ETH Function Setting provides the following options:
Bridge Setting
Bridge function is also known as the switching function, which enables the device in
the multiple network segments can communicate with each other. User can configure
the FDB (forward database) aging time, default VLAN ID and VLAN mode here.
ETH Port Setting
This function provides the abilities that configure the attributes of the Ethernet port
on the front panel of iPASOLINK, including port name, line speed, Mode, Flow
Control etc.
VLAN Setting
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) enables multiple devices that are separated
physically can communicate as they are located in a same broadcast domain and also
protect the data from sending to other domain even they may connect physically.
This function provides the abilities of creating, configuring and deleting the VLAN.
FDB Setting
iPASOLINK can learn the MAC address of the Ethernet frame dynamically and save
the port MAC address mapping information into FDB (Forwarding DataBase)
based on 802.1d for each VLAN. User can also add the static mapping information
manually by this function.
ETH OAM Setting
iPASOLINK supports Ethernet OAM function based on Y.1731 and 802.1ag, which
enables operator to measure the Ethernet link quality such as delay, throughput, jitter,
loss and so on, greatly help network operator in maintenance and troubleshooting.
RSTP Setting
iPASOLINK supports RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) which prevents from
layer 2 level link loop with a faster manner comparing to legacy STP protocol.
User can set the priority of the bridge; specify the role of the Ethernet port and other
parameters.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-18 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
ERP Setting
High-speed protection switch and load balancing are realized by G.8032 Ethernet
Ring Protection. The maintenance can be done with minimum service affecting by
the administrative operation, such as manual/forced switching.
Load balancing works under the normal operation, and the higher priority traffic
can be secured by QoS management.
Fast Switch-over (<50ms) with 3.3ms period, hardware based ETH-CC.
Administrative operation:
Forced switching
Manual switching
Revertive / Non-revertive
The combination of logical ring set-up and load balancing achieves double capacity
transmission.
Link Aggregation Setting
Link Aggregation achieves high capacity and resiliency transport with bundling
several radio links. The distribution algorithm distributes the packet according to:
L2 based: Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, Physical Port
ID.
L3&L4 based: Source & Destination IP, Source & Destination TCP/UDP Port
Number
Also, ETH Ports support Both of LACP and Non-LACP operation with carrier class
1:1 LACP Protection.
QoS/Classification Setting
iPASOLINK supports QoS control function that provides different priority to
different applications, users, or data flow or to guarantee a certain level of
performance to a data flow. User can configure Class Classification, Ingress Policer,
Egress QoS and SP, TDM E1 QoS on MODEM to realize differential service
strategy.
Filter Setting
This function provides layer2 filtering parameter database based user-plane
discarding filter for solving security issue.
Parameters: multiple combination of MAC DA/SA, CoS, Ether Type, VLAN ID
with "any" or "wildcard" description
Filter profile based easy to use configuration
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-19
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting
L2CP Transparent transport function is useful for L2CP tunneling, especially MEF 9
Compliant ETH Private Line (EPL) Service. Transported L2CP protocols can be
specified by checking boxes independently.
Port Mirroring enables to monitor the traffic at another (mirrored) port without traffic
of source port interruption. Ingress, egress or both direction of the port to be mirrored
to the destination port can be specified
Port Isolate Setting
Port isolation can restrict the transmission even within the same VLAN. Ports which
are configured as port isolation cannot communicate with another same VLAN port.
Also, broadcast traffic is not transmitted. This function can protect the user traffic
from the attacks such as being executed from inside own network (same subnet).
LLF Setting
LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) is the function that mandatory shuts down the port on
the opposite device when local device detects unidirectional link problem.
Broadcast Storm Control Setting
This function discards flooding frames in a specific interface without transferring.
This function can set also flooding transferring control in unit of ETH port including
MODEM port. By specifying the bandwidth of broadcast frame, multicast frame, and
unknown address unicast frame collectively, frames beyond the specified band are
discarded at the circuit input.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-20 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.2 Bridge Setting
Procedure 5-8
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Bridge Setting. The Bridge Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-29 Bridge Setting Window
Bridge Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-30 Bridge Setting Option Window
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-21
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-31 Information Dialog Box
7. The Bridge Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.
Figure 5-32 Bridge Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-8 Bridge Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Aging On/Off On Enables the FDB (Forwarding Data Base) to delete the learnt
MAC Address if it is not updated for a certain period specified
by the FDB Aging Time.
Off Disables the Aging function.
FDB Aging Time 5 to 163680 Specifies the aging time period when the Aging function is
enabled. [unit: second]
GbE MAX Frame Size 64 to 9600 Specifies the maximum frame size for a GbE (Giga-bit
Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]
FE MAX Frame Size 64 to 2000 Specifies the maximum frame size for an FE (Fast Ethernet)
port. [unit: byte]
VLAN Mode 802.1q Allows the port for different VLANs to communicate with each
other through a Layer-3 network device.
802.1ad Allows the switches in a service provider network to
transparently carry customers Layer-2 control frames,
separate from the service providers traffic and from other
traffic in the service providers network.
Default VID 1 to 4094 Enter the default VID of the equipment. [default: 1]
Default VLAN TPID 8100 to
FFFF
Specifies the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) value of VLAN.
[default: 0x8100]
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-22 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.3 ETH Port Setting
Procedure 5-9
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH Port Setting. The ETH Port Setting window appears.
3. Click the desired Port No. to configure.
Figure 5-33 ETH Port Setting Window
ETH Port Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-34 ETH Port Setting Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-23
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-35 Information Dialog Box
The ETH Port Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-36 ETH Port Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-9 ETH Port Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port Usage Enable Enable the port administratively.
Disable Shut down the port administratively.
Port Name (text field) Enter the Ethernet Port name. Valid value is zero to 32 characters long.
Media Type Electrical (Not editable.)
Optical
Speed AUTO Sets Autonegotiation to select the speed at establishing each link.
Selecting AUTO disables Duplex and MDI and MDIX options below.
10Mbps Specifies 10 Mbit/s rate.
100Mbps Specifies 100 Mbit/s rate.
1000Mbps Specifies 1000 Mbit/s rate.
Duplex Half Specifies the duplex mode. This option is disabled when the Speed
option selects AUTO.
Full
MDI and MDIX MDI Specifies the port media type. This option is disabled when the Speed
option selects AUTO.
MDIX
Flow Control Enable Enables the Flow Control function.
Disable Disables the Flow Control function.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-24 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.4 VLAN Setting
5.3.4.1 VLAN List
(1) Add VLAN ID
Procedure 5-10
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the Add VLAN ID button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-37 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)
The Add VLAN ID option window appears.
4. Specify VLAN ID (for 802.1q) or S-VLAN ID (for 802.1ad) and VLAN Service
Name:
Figure 5-38 Add VLAN ID Option Window (example: 802.1q)
VLAN List tab
Add VLAN ID button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-25
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-39 Information Dialog Box
The VLAN Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-40 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-10 Add VLAN ID Parameters
Parameter Value Description
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
[For 802.1q] Enter VLAN ID.
S-VLAN ID [For 8021.ad] Enter S-VLAN ID.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter VLAN Service Name. Valid value is one to
32 characters long.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-26 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.4.2 Modify VLAN Service Name
Procedure 5-11
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the target object under the VLAN Service
Name.
Figure 5-41 VLAN Setting VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)
Modify VLAN Service Name option window appears.
4. Enter the modified name into the VLAN Service Name text box, then click the
OK button.
Figure 5-42 Modify VLAN Service Name Option Window (example: 802.1q)
Information dialog box appears.
VLAN List tab
select a target object
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-27
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-43 Information Dialog Box
The VLAN Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-44 VLAN Setting Window (example: 802.1q)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-28 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.4.3 Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID
Procedure 5-12
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the Delete VLAN ID button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-45 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)
The Delete VLAN ID option window appears.
4. Enter the VLAN ID / S-VLAN ID or VLAN Service Name to be removed:
Figure 5-46 Delete VLAN ID Option Window VLAN ID (example: 802.1q)
Figure 5-47 Delete VLAN ID Option Window VLAN Service Name
VLAN List tab
Delete VLAN button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-29
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-48 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-49 Information Dialog Box
The VLAN Setting window updates the information.
8. Verify the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-50 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-30 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.4.4 VLAN Setting
(1) Set VLAN ID (802.1q Mode)
Procedure 5-13
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN Setting tab, then click a port number (listed under thePort) to
register VLAN settings.
Figure 5-51 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab
VLAN Setting option window appears.
4. Select a Port Type, and specify the required parameters according to the selected
port type:
Figure 5-52 VLAN Setting Option Window
NOTE: For MODEM, Trunk is the only choice to select.
VLAN Setting tab
Port Numbers
Port Type
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-31
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Port Type: Access
Figure 5-53 VLAN Setting Option Window Access
Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Access.
The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.
Incoming tagged frames are discarded at the ports selected here.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-32 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Port Type: Tunnel
Figure 5-54 VLAN Setting Option Window Tunnel
Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Tunnel.
At the ports selected here, any frame types, either untagged or tagged with any
VLAN ID, are unconditionally tagged (Outer tag) with the VLAN ID, which is
checked in the list.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-33
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Port Type: Trunk
Figure 5-55 VLAN Setting Option Window Trunk
Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Trunk.
At the ports selected here, tagged frames with the VLAN IDs that are checked in
the list are allowed to pass through.
An untagged frame will be assigned with the VLAN ID of the selected VLAN in
UntagFrame Assignment column.
Other types of frames are discarded.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-34 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-56 Information Dialog Box
The VLAN Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-57 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-11 VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port/VLAN Configuration (read only) Indicates the information of selected port.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1q Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type Access Allows untagged frames only to pass through.
Tunnel Allows both untagged and tagged frames to pass through.
Trunk Allows the selected tagged and untagged frames to pass
through. An untagged frame will be assigned with the
specified VLAN ID.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable (check box) Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.
UntagFrame Assignment
(Access Port)
(radio button) Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged
frame.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-35
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(2) Set S-VLAN ID (802.1ad Mode)
Procedure 5-14
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN Setting tab, then click a port number (listed under thePort) to
register VLAN settings.
Figure 5-58 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab
VLAN Setting option window appears.
4. Select a Port Type, and specify the required parameters according to the selected
port type:
Figure 5-59 VLAN Setting Option Window
NOTE: For MODEM, C-Bridge is the only choice to select.
VLAN Setting tab
Port Numbers
Port Type
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-36 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Port Type: C-Access
Figure 5-60 VLAN Setting Option Window C-Access
Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: C-Access.
The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.
Incoming tagged frames are discarded at the ports selected here.
Table 5-12 VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port/VLAN Configuration (read only) Indicates the information of selected port.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1ad Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type C-Access Allows untagged frames only to pass through.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable (check box) Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.
C-Frame Assignment
(C-Access Port)
(radio button) Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged
frame.
C-VLAN ID
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-37
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Port Type: S-Trunk
Figure 5-61 VLAN Setting Option Window S-Trunk
Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: S-Trunk.
At the ports selected here, any frame types, either untagged or tagged with any
VLAN ID, are unconditionally tagged (Outer tag) with the VLAN ID, which is
checked in the list.
Table 5-13 VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port/VLAN Configuration (read only) Indicates the information of selected port.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1ad Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type S-Trunk Allows tagged and untagged frames to pass through.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable (check box) Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.
C-Frame Assignment
(C-Access Port)
(radio button) Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged
frame.
C-VLAN ID
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-38 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Port Type: C-Bridge
Figure 5-62 VLAN Setting Option Window C-Bridge
Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: C-Bridge.
At the ports selected here, tagged frames with S-VLAN ID that are checked in the
list will be allowed to pass through.
The C-Tagged frames will be assigned with an S-VLAN ID of the selected
VLAN in C-tagFrame Assignment column.
The other frames will be discarded.
i) To enter the C-VLAN ID, click the
Undefined link under the C-VLAN ID.
The C-VLAN ID option window
appears.
ii) Enter the ID or the appropriate value.
iii) Click the OK button. The VLAN Setting
option window updates the C-VLAN ID
Information.
click the link
Figure 5-63 Modify C-VLAN ID
Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-39
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Figure 5-64 VLAN Setting Option Window
Table 5-14 VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port/VLAN Configuration (read only) Indicates the information of selected port.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1ad Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type C-Bridge Allows the selected tagged and untagged frames to pass
through. C-tagged frames will be assigned with a specified
VLAN-ID.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable (check box) Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.
C-Frame Assignment
(C-Access Port)
(radio button) Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged
frame.
C-VLAN ID Undefined Indicates the specified values.
All
1 to 40
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-40 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-65 Information Dialog Box
The VLAN Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-66 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-41
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.5 FDB Setting
5.3.5.1 FDB Setting
(1) FDB Setting (Equipment)
Procedure 5-15
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the FDB Setting tab, then click the Equipment link.
Figure 5-67 FDB Setting FDB Setting Tab
FDB Setting (Equipment) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-68 FDB Setting (Equipment) Option Window
Equipment link
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-42 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-69 Information Dialog Box
The FDB Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-70 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-15 FDB Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Learning MAX
Size
1 to 32512 Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC Address entries.
Learning Limit
Mode
Forward If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address exceeds the
maximum size of FDB, the frame without learning this source MAC
Address will be forwarded.
Discard If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address discarded.
Learning Limit
Trap
Enable Enables the equipment to send a trap if the Learning MAC Address
reaches the specified MAX size.
Disable Disables the action above.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-43
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(2) FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Service Tab
Procedure 5-16
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the FDB Setting tab and Service tab, then click on the desired VLAN ID
number to configure.
Figure 5-71 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab
FDB Setting option window appears.
4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:
Figure 5-72 FDB Setting Option Window
FDB Setting tab
Service tab
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-44 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-73 Information Dialog Box
The FDB Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-74 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-16 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Learning MAX Size 0 to 32512 Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC Address entries.
Learning Limit Mode Forward If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address exceeds
the maximum size of FDB, the frame without learning this source
MAC Address will be forwarded.
Discard If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address discarded.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-45
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) FDB Setting Port Tab
Procedure 5-17
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the FDB Setting tab and Port tab, then click on the desired Port number to
configure.
Figure 5-75 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab
FDB Setting option window appears.
4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:
Figure 5-76 FDB Setting Option Window
Table 5-17 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Learning MAX Size (Port) 0 to 32384 Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC Address entries.
FDB Setting tab
Port tab
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-46 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-77 Information Dialog Box
The FDB Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-78 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-47
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.5.2 Static Entry Setting
(1) Add Static Entry
Procedure 5-18
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Add button.
Figure 5-79 FDD Setting Window Static Entry Tab
Static Entry (Add) option window appears.
4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-80 Static Entry (Add) Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-48 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-81 Information Dialog Box
The FDB Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-82 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-18 FDB Setting (Static Entry) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Item (Available Card) Names of available (registered) cards are shown in the
drop-down list. Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Available (registered) ports are shown in the drop-down
list. Select the target port.
MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Enter the object MAC Address.
Enable (radio button) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to assign the port to
the specified VLAN.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-49
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(2) Modify Static Entry
Procedure 5-19
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Entry No. of the target to modify.
Figure 5-83 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab
Static Entry (Static Entry No. xxx) option window for the selected object
appears.
4. Edit the MAC Address, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-84 Static Entry Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
Entry No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-50 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-85 Information Dialog Box
The FDB Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-86 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-51
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) Delete Static Entry
Procedure 5-20
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Delete button.
Figure 5-87 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab
Static Entry (Delete) option window for the selected object appears.
4. Check (leave a tick in) the check box of the target object, then click the OK
button.
Figure 5-88 Static Entry Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-52 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-89 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-90 Information Dialog Box
The FDB Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-91 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-53
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.6 ETH OAM Setting
OAM: Operation, Administration & Maintenance
MEG: Maintenance Entity Group
MEP: MEG End Point
MIP: MEG Intermediate Point
5.3.6.1 OAM MEG Setting
(1) Add OAM MEG Index
Procedure 5-21
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Add MEG button.
Figure 5-92 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab
OAM MEG Setting (Add) option window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-54 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-93 OAM MEG Setting (Add) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-94 Information Dialog Box
Table 5-19 OAM MEG Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
MEG Index 1 to 128 Set MEG Index number.
Maintenance Domain Name (text field) Maximum length in total of Maintenance Domain
Name and Short MA Name is 43 characters long.
Short MA Name (text field)
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify the MEG level.
ETH-CC Period 3.3ms Set the period of ETH-CC (Continuity Check)
Message.
10ms
100ms
1s
10s
60s
CCM Enable Enable to output/monitor CCM.
Disable Disable to output/monitor CCM.
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the CCM
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-55
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-95 ETH ADM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-56 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Delete OAM MEG Index
Procedure 5-22
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Delete MEG button.
Figure 5-96 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab
OAM MEG Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Enter the MEG Index number of the target to be removed, then click the OK
button.
Figure 5-97 OAM MEG Setting (Delete) Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-57
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-98 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-99 Information Dialog Box
The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the target OAM MEG has been removed.
Figure 5-100 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-58 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.6.2 OAM MEP Setting
(1) Add OAM MEP Index
Procedure 5-23
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the Add MEP button.
Figure 5-101 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab
OAM MEP Setting (Add) option window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-59
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Add Peer MEP ID first:
Figure 5-102 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window
i) From the list in the MEG Configuration option box, click the Enable radio
button of the target to select.
ii) Click Add Peer MEP button in the Peer MEP Configuration option box. The
Peer MEP Add option window appears.
iii) Enter the Peer MEP ID to add.
Figure 5-103 Peer MEP Add Option Box
iv) Click the OK button. The Peer MEP Configuration option box updates the
entries.
Table 5-20 Peer MEP Add Option Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Peer MEP ID 1 to 8191 Assign MEP ID of the peer equipment
i) Enable radio buttons I) Add Peer MEP button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-60 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Specify the remaining parameters in the OAM MEP Setting (Add) option
window:
Figure 5-104 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 5-21 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify a local MEP Index number.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify an ID to the MEG Index.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a
VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with an MEG Configuration.
Peer MEP Configuration
Add Peer MEP (button) Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.
Enable / Peer MEP ID (radio button, list) This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by MEG
Configuration.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-61
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-105 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-106 Information Dialog Box
The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
9. Confirm that the newly added MEP Index information is displayed.
Figure 5-107 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-62 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Modify OAM MEP Index
Procedure 5-24
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the MEP Index number of the target to be
modified.
Figure 5-108 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab
OAM MEP Setting (Modify) option window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-63
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Modify the parameters:
Figure 5-109 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 5-22 OAM MEP Index Parameters
Parameter Value Description
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify a local MEP Index number.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify an ID to the MEG Index.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a
VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with an MEG Configuration.
Peer MEP Configuration
Add Peer MEP (button) Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.
Enable / Peer MEP ID (radio button, list) This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by MEG
Configuration.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-64 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button.
Confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-110 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-111 Information Dialog Box
ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the modified parameter(s) is/are displayed.
Figure 5-112 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-65
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) Delete OAM MEP Index
Procedure 5-25
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the Delete MEP button of the target to be
removed.
Figure 5-113 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab
OAM MEP Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Select an MEP Index number of the target to be removed.
Figure 5-114 OAM MEP Setting (Delete) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.
OAM MEP tab
Delete MEP button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-66 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Figure 5-115 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-116 Information Dialog Box
NOTE: When the CCM Transmit / CCM Receive is enabled, the following error message
appears upon executing the deletion operation.
Figure 5-117 Error Message
To delete the MEP Index properly, disable the CCM Transmit / CCM Receive first,
using the procedure provided in (2) Modify OAM MEP Index.
When the operation is successfully completed, the ETH OAM Setting window
updates the information.
8. Confirm that the target OAM MEP Index has been removed.
Figure 5-118 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-67
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.6.3 OAM MIP Setting
(1) Add OAM MIP Index
Procedure 5-26
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click the Add MIP button.
Figure 5-119 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab
OAM MIP Setting (Add) option window appears.
OAM MIP tab
Add MIP button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-68 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-120 OAM MIP Setting (Add) Option Window
When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-23 OAM MIP Index Parameter
Parameter Value Description
MIP Configuration
MIP Index 1 to 128 Specify an MIP Index number.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MG Level to the MIP.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-69
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-121 Information Dialog Box
ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-122 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-70 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Modify OAM MIP Index
Procedure 5-27
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click on the MIP Index number of the target.
Figure 5-123 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab
OAM MIP Setting (Modify) option window appears.
MIP Index numbers
OAM MIP tab
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-71
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Modify the parameter(s):
Figure 5-124 OAM MIP Setting (Modify) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-24 OAM MIP Index Parameter
Parameter Value Description
MIP Configuration
MIP Index 1 to 128 Specify an MIP Index number.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MEG Level to the MIP.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-72 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-125 Information Dialog Box
he ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the information of modified parameter(s) is displayed.
Figure 5-126 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-73
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) Delete OAM MIP Index
Procedure 5-28
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click on the Delete MIP button.
Figure 5-127 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab
OAM MIP Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Select the MIP Index number of the target, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-128 OAM MIP Setting (Delete) Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
OAM MIP tab
Delete MIP button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-74 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-129 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-130 Information Dialog Box
The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the target OAM MIP Index has been removed.
Figure 5-131 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-75
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.7 RSTP Setting
STP: Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel function cannot be enabled on a port if it enables RSTP.
5.3.7.1 Modify RSTP Port
Procedure 5-29
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select RSTP Setting. The RSTP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify RSTP Port button.
Figure 5-132 RSTP Setting Window
TheRSTP Port Setting option window appears.
Modify RSTP Port button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-76 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-133 RSTP Port Setting Option Window
Table 5-25 RSTP Port Setting Parameter
Parameter Value Description
STP Mode RSTP Enables RSTP.
Disable Disables RSTP.
Enable (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to select the target object.
Item (read only) Shows the information regarding the available cards.
Slot (read only)
Port (read only)
Port Name (read only
STP Port Path Cst Auto Enables the function to automatically calculate the path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path costs.
STP Port Path Cost
(Value)
1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost to Manual.
Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority.
Edge Port Enable Sets the target port to Edge Port.
Disable Removes the Edge Port setting from the target port.
P to P Port Force true Sets Point-to-Point
Force False Removes the Point-to-Point setting.
Auto Sets Point-to-Point automatically.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-77
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-134 Information Dialog Box
The RSTP Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters:
Figure 5-135 RSTP Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-78 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.7.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter
Procedure 5-30
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select RSTP Setting. The RSTP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify Detail RSTP Parameter button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-136 RSTP Setting Window
TheDetail RSTP Parameter Setting option window appears.
Modify Detail RSTP Parameter button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-79
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-137 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-138 Information Dialog Box
The RSTP Setting window updates the information.
Table 5-26 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting
Parameter Value Description
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440 Sets STP Priority of the bridge.
STP Bridge MAX Age 6 to 40 Sets the period to store the BPDU Configuration.
Bridge acknowledges that a topology change has
occurred when the MAX Age passes putting the
BPDU aged out. [unit: second]
STP Bridge Hello Time 1 Sets the period for sending the BPDU Configuration
from Root Bridge. [unit: second]
2
STP Bridge Forward Delay 4 to 30 Sets the delay period to execute the change from the
Listening Port to Learning Port.
STP TX Hold Count 1 to 10 Sets the number of BPDUs that can be sent per
second.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-80 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. Verify the displayed information:
Figure 5-139 RSTP Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
5.3.8 ERP Setting
Following shows the procedures for ETH-Ring Protection switch settings:
Procedure 5-31
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ERP Setting. The ERP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify ERP Mode tool button.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-81
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Figure 5-140 ERP Setting
ERP Mode Setting option window appears.
4. Select Enable by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-141 ERP Mode Setting Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-142 Information Dialog Box
The ERP Setting window enables the Add ERP tool button.
6. Click the Add ERP tool button.
Modify ERP Mode button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-82 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Figure 5-143 ERP Setting Window
Step 1 ERP Setting option window appears.
7. Set the appropriate values, then click the Next button:
Figure 5-144 Step 1 ERP Setting Window
Add ERP button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-83
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
NOTE: The Ring Port 0 must be connected to the Ring Port 1 of the opposing
equipment.
Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting option window appears.
Table 5-27 Step 1 ERP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Ring ID 01 to 16 Assign the ID number of the Ring.
Ring Name (text field) Enter the Ring name to apply. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters long.
Ring Type Major Ring Major Ring is the only choice here.
ERP Version G.8032v1 Select the ERP Version. G.8032v2 only supports multiple ring ID for the
ports.
G.8032v2
Ring Port0
Item Specify the type.
Port Specify the port.
Port Name (read only) Indicates the selected ports name.
Ring Port1
Item Specify the type.
Port Specify the port.
Port Name (read only) Indicates the selected ports name.
RPL Owner Enable The RPL Owner node is an ETH Ring node adjacent to the RPL that is
responsible for blocking its end of the RPL under normal conditions.
Only one RPL Owner node should exist in the Ring.
Disable
RPL Port Port0 Specify the RPL Port. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner
setting is enabled.
Port1
Revertive Mode Revertive Revertive mode switches the Active port back to the original port when
recovered. Non Revertive mode does not. This option is enabled when
the RPL Owner setting is enabled.
Non Revertive
WTR 5 [min] A period to wait before restoring back when the system recovered from
the failure. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner setting is
enabled.
Guard Time 10 to 2000 [ms] The Guard Timer is active whenever an ETH Ring node receives an
indication that a local switching request has cleared.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-84 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
8. Assign the appropriate values, then click the Next button:
Figure 5-145 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Option Window
Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting option window appears.
Table 5-28 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Control VLAN ID 1 to 4094 A VLAN ID is used for R-APS transmission. Control
VLAN ID for each Ring must be unique.
R-APS Message Priority 0 to 7 VLAN CoS field of R-APS frame. [default: 7]
R-APS Message MEG Level 0 to 7 MEG level of R-APS message. [default: 7]
Traffic VLAN ID
Enable (check box)
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-85
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
9. Assign the appropriate values, then click the Next button.
Figure 5-146 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Option Window
Step 4 Setting Configuration Screen window appears to show the specified
information.
Table 5-29 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
LOC Detection Enable Enables to detect failures for switching the Ring
using ETH-CC. To carry out the switching under 50
ms, this setting is required with 3.3 ms ETH-CC
setting.
Disable Disables the LOC Detection.
Ring Port0 / Ring Port1
LOC Detection MEP Index (radio button) Check (select) to enable the use of MEP Index.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-86 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
10. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-147 Step 4 Setting Configuration Screen
11. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-148 Information Dialog Box
The ERP Setting window updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-87
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
12. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-149 ERP Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-88 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.9 Link Aggregation
5.3.9.1 Add Link Aggregation
NOTE: For the Radio System, LAG should be assigned by the Radio Traffic
Aggregation that is provided in the Radio Configuration. See the subsection
4.6.2.2 Radio Configuration for details.
Procedure 5-32
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Add LAG tool button.
Figure 5-150
NOTE: When the Radio Group for the Radio Traffic Aggregation has
been registered, the registered information is listed in this
window as well.
The Add LAG option window appears.
Add LAG button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-89
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the LAG:
Figure 5-151 Add LAG Option Window
Table 5-30 Add LAG Option Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Link Aggregation Group
LAG (read only) Indicates the type of registered LAG; ETH GRP or Radio GRP.
LAG Name (text field) Enter the Link Aggregation Group name to apply. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
Mode
[This option is for
ETH GRP only.]
LACP-Active Outputs frames along the configured links regardless of settings on the
other side.
LACP-Passive Outputs or not to output depending on the settings on the other side;
outputs frames if the other sides control value is Active.
Static Static operation mode using no LACP.
TX Interval Short Sets the an output interval of LACPDUs mode for one second.
Long Selects an output interval of LACPDUs mode for 30 seconds.
Revertive Revertive Switches the active port back to the original port when recovered.
Non Revertive Does not switch the active port back even if recovered.
Distribution
Rule
L2 Base Distribution is based on the Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID,
Ethernet Type and Physical Port ID.
L3 Base Distribution is based on the Source & Destination IP, Source &
Destination TCP/UDP Port number.
MPLS Base Distribution is based on the MPLS label.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-90 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button. Information dialog box
appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed. The Link Aggregation Setting window updates
the window.
Figure 5-152 Information Dialog Box
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-153 Link Aggregation Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Link Aggregation Port
LAG Not Used To assign the LAG, select ETH GRP.
ETH GRP
Port Role Active Specify each port to Active/Standby. At least one port must be the
Active.
Standby
Table 5-30 Add LAG Option Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-91
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.9.2 Modify LAG Registration
Procedure 5-33
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Modify Link Aggregation tool button.
Figure 5-154 Link Aggregation Setting Window
Link Aggregation Setting option window appears.
Modify Link Aggregation button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-92 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Modify parameters:
i) Select the target LAG (Link Aggregation Group) from the LAG drop-down list.
ii) Modify applicable parameters.
iii) Click the OK button when completed.
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-155 Information Dialog Box
The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the window.
select LAG
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-93
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-156 Link Aggregation Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-94 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.9.3 Delete LAG Registration
Procedure 5-34
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Delete LAG tool button.
Figure 5-157
The Delete LAG option window appears.
4. Check (click to leave a tick in the) check box of the LAG to be removed, then
click the OK button.
Figure 5-158 Delete LAG Option Window
Delete LAG button
check box
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-95
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-159 Information Dialog Box
The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-160 Link Aggregation Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-96 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.10 QoS/Classification Setting
Classify Setting tab
iPASOLINK supports QoS based on MEF10 and REC4115, which classifies the
traffic into eight or four classes with the proper Internal Priority according to the
predetermined profile. Except for the default profile, a user can configure up to three
additional profiles, which provides a capability of realizing the flexible and user-
orientated QoS strategy. The Internal Priority is used for the following purposes:
i) Properly identifies the ingress traffic according to the predetermined Priority.
ii) Maps the eight classes of ingress traffic to four or eight classes at queuing the
egress traffic.
iii) Copies the original internal priority to the capsulated frame to prevent the
traffic priority from changing unexpectedly. (VLAN C-tag CoS/VLAN S-tag
CoS)
Three modes are available for QoS Classification.
1. Equipment Based QoS Mode (default)
QoS classification policies are determined by per-equipment basis. One classification
profile is activated, and up to three profiles are stored on the equipment
configuration. In this mode, most outer QoS field of the packet can be specified for
the classification policy.
2. Port Based QoS Mode
QoS classification policies are determined by per-port basis. In this mode, inner QoS
field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.
3. VLAN ID Based QoS Mode
QoS classification policies are determined by per-VLAN ID basis. In this mode,
VLAN ID field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.
Ingress
At the ingress traffic, the internal priority is assigned to a frame to perform the flow
control according to the predetermined policer and the Yellow or Green Marker that
is applied to the frame to define whether to discard or forward the frame.
Egress
At the egress traffic, frames are queued according to the internal priority where the
Yellow or Green Marker is applied to determine whether to discard or forward the
frame.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-97
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.10.1 Classification Setting (Equipment Based QoS Mode)
(1) Classification Entry Setting
Procedure 5-35
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Select Profile No. button.
Figure 5-161 QoS/Classification Setting Window
The Select Profile No. option window appears.
4. Select a Profile No. to specify, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-162 Select Profile No. Option Window
The QoS/Classification Setting window indicates the selected Profile No. in the
Current Classify Profile Information field.
Select Profile No. button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-98 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.
Figure 5-163 QoS/Classification Setting Window
6. Select Equipment Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the
OK button.
Figure 5-164 Classification Mode Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-165 Information Dialog Box
Classification Mode
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-99
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
8. From the Classify Profile No. drop-down list, select the profile number of the
target object:.
Figure 5-166 QoS/Classification Setting Window
TheQoS/Classification Setting shows the selected profile.
9. Click the Entry No. of the target to be classified.
Figure 5-167 QoS/Classification Setting Window (showing the target)
Classify Entry Setting option window appears.
Classify Profile No.
Entry No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-100 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
10. Assign the Internal Priority to classify the target port:
Figure 5-168 Classify Entry Setting Option Window
11. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
12. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-169 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.
Table 5-31 Classify Entry Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Classify Field type VLAN CoS Selects to use VLAN with CoS priority tag.
IPv4 Precedence Selects to use IPv4 Precedence.
IPv4 DSCP Selects to use IPv4 DSCP.
IPv6 DSCP Selects to use IPv6 DSCP.
MPLS EXP Selects to use MPLS EXP.
Classify Priority 0 to 7 Enter the priority class.
Classify Internal Priority 0 to 7 Select the internal priority class.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-101
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
13. Verify the displayed parameters:
Figure 5-170 QoS Classification Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-102 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Delete Entry
Procedure 5-36
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.
Figure 5-171 QoS/Classification Setting Window
4. Select Equipment Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the
OK button.
Figure 5-172 Classification Mode Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Classification Mode
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-103
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-173 Information Dialog Box
6. From the Classify Profile No. drop-down list, select the profile number of the
target object:.
Figure 5-174 QoS/Classification Setting Window
TheQoS/Classification Setting shows the selected profile.
Classify Profile No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-104 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. Click the Delete Entry button.
Figure 5-175 QoS/Classification Setting Window (showing the target)
Delete Entry option window appears.
8. Select an entry number to be removed, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-176 Delete Entry Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
9. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-177 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
Delete Entry button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-105
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
10. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-178 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the
information.
11. Verify that the selected entry is removed from the list.
Figure 5-179 QoS/Classification Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-106 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.10.2 Classification Setting (Port Based QoS Mode)
(1) Specify Port Classification Mode
Following steps specify the QoS Classification Mode and Default Priority of
Ingress direction for each port.
Procedure 5-37
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.
Figure 5-180 QoS/Classification Setting Window
4. Select Port Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK
button.
Figure 5-181 Classification Mode Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Classification Mode
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-107
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-182 Information Dialog Box
6. Select a target Port No.:
Figure 5-183 QoS/Classification Setting Window
Port Classification Mode Setting option window appears.
7. Specify the Port Classification Mode and Default Port Priority for the target port:
Figure 5-184 Port Classification Mode Setting Option Window
Port No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-108 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
9. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-185 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the
information.
10. Verify the displayed parameters:
Figure 5-186 QoS Classification Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-32 Port Classification Mode Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port Classification Mode Port For frames input at the target port, the internal priority of all
frames will be the default port priority value. [default]
CoS(C-Tag) C-Tag value will be the internal priority value.
CoS(S-Tag) S-Tag value will be the internal priority value. This option
can be selected when VLAN Mode is 802.1ad.
IPv4/v6 DSCP The value that is mapped into eight classes according to
IPv4/v6 DSCP value will be the internal priority value. A
mapping table is set per equipment.
Default Port Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the default internal priority to the target port.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-109
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(2) Specify DSCP Classification Mapping
Procedure 5-38
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.
Figure 5-187 QoS/Classification Setting Window
4. Select Port Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK
button.
Figure 5-188 Classification Mode Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Classification Mode
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-110 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-189 Information Dialog Box
6. Click the DSCP Classification Mapping button:
Figure 5-190 QoS/Classification Setting Window
The DSCP Classification Mapping option window appears.
DSCP Classification Mapping button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-111
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Specify values to parameters:
Figure 5-191 DSCP Classification Mapping Option Window
8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-33 DSCP Classification Mapping Parameters
Parameter Value Description
DSCP Value 0 to 63 DSCP values (0 to 63) in the User Frame Header.
Internal Priority 0 to 7 Assign the Internal Priority (0 to 7) to each DSCP
value.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-112 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
9. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-192 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the
information.
10. Verify the displayed parameters:
Figure 5-193 QoS Classification Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-113
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.10.3 Ingress Setting
(1) Add Policer Index
Procedure 5-39
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click the Add Policer Index button:
Figure 5-194 QoS/Classification Setting Window
TheAdd Policer Index option window appears.
Ingress Setting tab
Add Policer Index button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-114 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Create the police index:
Figure 5-195 Add Policer Index Option Window
When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-34 Add Policer Index Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Policer Index 1 to 256 Specify the Policer index number.
Item (available card) Select a name of the target card.
Port (available port) Select a port.
Internal Priority 0 to 7 Specify the internal priority.
Policer Profile No. 1 to 16 Specify the Policer Profile number to apply.
VLAN ID (check box) Enable VLAN ID option box below.
Enable (radio button) Click to enable a policer.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-115
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-196 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) updates the information.
6. Verify the newly added ingress policer index:
Figure 5-197 QoS/Classification Setting Window Ingress Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-116 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Set Ingress Policer Profile Details
Procedure 5-40
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click the Ingress Policer Profile
Setting button:
Figure 5-198 QoS/Classification Setting Window
TheIngress Policer Profile Setting option window appears.
Ingress Setting tab
Ingress Policer Profile Setting button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-117
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Click the No. of the target Ingress Policer Profile Index:
Figure 5-199 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window
The Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting option window appears.
Figure 5-200 Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting Option Window
Table 5-35 Ingress Policer Detail Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Classify Eir 0 to 1000000 Enter the maximum bandwidth. [unit: kbps]
Classify Cir 0 to 1000000 Enter the minimum guaranteed bandwidth. [unit: kbps}
Classify Ebs 0 to 128 Enter the maximum burst size. [unit: kbyte]
Classify Cbs 0 to 64 Enter the minimum burst size. [unit kbyte]
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-118 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-201 Information Dialog Box
The Ingress Policer Profile Setting option window updates the information.
7. Verify the contents, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-202 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-119
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
8. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-203 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) updates the information.
9. Verify the newly added ingress policer index:
Figure 5-204 QoS/Classification Setting Window Ingress Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-120 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(3) Modify Policer Index
Procedure 5-41
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click to select a Policer Index
number of the target object:
Figure 5-205 QoS/Classification Setting Window
Ingress Policer Setting option window appears.
Ingress Setting tab
Policer Index numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-121
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Modify parameters:
Figure 5-206 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-36 Ingress Policer Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Policer Index (read only) Indicates the selected Index number.
Internal Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the internal priority.
Policer Profile No. 1 to 16 Specifies the policer profile number to be applied to the
port.
VLAN ID (check box) Enables/Disables the policer of selected VLANs below.
Enable (radio button) Enables to set VLAN Service Name.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-122 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-207 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) window updates the
information.
7. Verify that the selected object is modified.
Figure 5-208 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-123
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(4) Delete Ingress Policer Index
Procedure 5-42
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click to select a Policer Index
number of the target object:
Figure 5-209 QoS/Classification Setting Window
Delete Policer Index option window appears.
Ingress Setting tab
Delete Policer Index button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-124 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Enter the Ingress Policer Index No. to be removed, then click the OK button:
Figure 5-210 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button.
Figure 5-211 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-212 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) window updates the
information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-125
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Verify that the selected object is removed.
Figure 5-213 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-126 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.10.4 Port Setting Tab
Procedure 5-43
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.
3. Click to select the Port Setting tab, then click on the Class Mode to open the
Class Mode Setting option window.
Figure 5-214 QoS/Classification Setting Window Port Setting Tag
4. Select a Class Mode by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button:
Figure 5-215 Class Mode Setting Option Window
Class Mode
Port Setting
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-127
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-216 Information Dialog Box
The Class Mode Setting option window closes.
6. Click a Port number of the target:
Figure 5-217 QoS/Classification Setting Window
QoS Port Setting option window appears.
Table 5-37 Ingress Policer Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Class Mode 4 Class QoS Sets an output queue to 4 Class. [default]
8 Class QoS Sets an output queue to 8 Class.
Port numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-128 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-218 QoS Port Setting Option Window
Table 5-38 QoS Port Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Port Setting
Scheduling Mode 4xSP Queuing modes for 4-Class QoS.
[SP: Strict-Priority; DWRR: Deficit Weighted Round Robin]
1xSP+3xDWRR
4xDWRR
1xSP+7xDWRR Queuing modes for 8-Class QoS.
2xSP+6xDWRR
Drop Mode WTD WTD (Weighted Tail Drop) sets the port to discard packets at the
tail end of the queue if the queue exceeds the specified
threshold.
WRED WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) sets the port to
randomly discards packets of traffic with the priority lower than
one with higher priority when queue exceeds the specified
threshold.
Egress Shaper Rate 1 to 1000 Sets the maximum rate at outputs for the egress queue.
[unit: Mbit/s]
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-129
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Internal Priority Queueing Policy per Ingress Port
Internal Priority 0 Class
to
Internal Priority 7 Class
0 to 7 Specifies the priority of ingress ports.
Egress Class Setting Information
Class 0
to
Class 7
(linked if
available)
Clicking the linked Class n opens Egress Class Setting option
window (Figure 5-219).
See Table 5-39 below.
Shaper Rate (read only) Indicates the specified data.
DWRR Weight (read only) Indicates the specified data.
Table 5-39 Egress Class Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Class Shaper Rate 0.001 to 1000 Specifies the maximum rate at output for the class.
[unit: Mbit/s]
Class DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Specifies the weight of the queue.
Class Queue Length 16 to 128 Specifies the length for each queue. [unit: kbyte]
Values for Queues 6 and 7 are fixed to 16 kbytes.
WTD Yellow Frame
Threshold
10 to 100 Sets the threshold of Yellow Frame.
WRED Yellow Frame
Threshold
10 to 100 Determines the threshold value for Yellow Frame.
WRED Green Frame
Threshold
10 to 100 Determines the threshold value for Green Frame.
Table 5-38 QoS Port Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Figure 5-219 Egress Class Setting Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-130 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
9. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-220 Information Dialog Box
The QoS Port Setting option window updates the window.
10. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-221 QoS Port Setting Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-131
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
11. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-222 Information Dialog Box
The QoS/Classification Setting (Port Setting tab) window updates the
information.
12. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-223 QoS/Classification Setting Window Port Setting Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-132 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.11 Filter Settings
5.3.11.1 Filter List
(1) Add Filter List
Procedure 5-44
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Filter List tab, then click the Add tool button:
Figure 5-224 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab
Add Filter Entry option window appears.
Filter List tab
Add button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-133
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Specify the filter conditions, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-225 Add Filter Entry Option Window
Table 5-40 Add Filter Entry Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Filter Type (read only) Indicates the filter type.
Filtering Rule
Filtering Mode (read only) Indicates the filtering mode.
Source MAC
Address
Any Selecting Any specifies no particular source MAC address to filter.
(text field) Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Source MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.
Destination MAC
Address
Any Selecting Any specifies no particular destination MAC address to filter.
(text field) Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Destination MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.
CoS Any Selecting Any specifies no particular CoS value to filter.
0 to 7 Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the CoS value to filter.
VLAN ID Any Selecting Any specifies no particular VLAN ID to filter.
1 to 4094 Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the VLAN ID to filter.
Ethernet Type Any Selecting Any specifies no particular Ethernet Type to filter.
0x0000 to
0xFFFF
Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Destination MAC Address to filter.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-134 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-226 Information Dialog Box
6. The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-227 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-135
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(2) Modify Filter List
Procedure 5-45
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Filter List tab, then click the Entry Index number of the target filter:
Figure 5-228 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab
Modify Filter Entry option window appears.
4. Modify the filter conditions. See Table 5-40 Add Filter Entry Parameters for
descriptions regarding the parameters.
Figure 5-229 Modify Filter Entry Option Window
Filter List tab
Entry Index
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-136 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When the modification is completed, click the OK button. Information dialog
box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-230 Information Dialog Box
7. The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.
8. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-231 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-137
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
(3) Delete Filter List
Procedure 5-46
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Filter List tab, then click the Delete tool button.
Figure 5-232 Filter Setting Filter List Tab
Delete Filter Entry option window appears.
Filter List tab
Delete button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-138 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Check (click to leave a tick in a) check box of the target filter, then click the OK
button.
Figure 5-233 Delete Filter Entry Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Figure 5-234 Confirmation Dialog Box
5. Click the OK button to proceed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-235 Information Dialog Box
The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-139
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-236 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-140 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.3.11.2 Profile List
(1) Add Profile List
Procedure 5-47
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Profile List tab, then click the Add tool button:
Figure 5-237 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab
Add Filter Profile option window appears.
4. Check (leave a tick in a) Select check box(es) of the porfile(s) to add, then click
the OK button.
Figure 5-238 Add Filter Entry Option Window
Profile List tab
Add button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-141
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-239 Information Dialog Box
The Filter Setting window (Profile List tab) updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-240 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-142 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Delete Profile List
Procedure 5-48
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Profile List tab, then click the Delete tool button.
Figure 5-241 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab
Delete Filter Entry option window appears.
Profile List tab
Delete button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-143
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Check (click to leave a tick in a) check box of the target filter, then click the OK
button.
Figure 5-242 Delete Filter Entry Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Figure 5-243 Confirmation Dialog Box
5. Click theOK button to proceed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-244 Information Dialog Box
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-144 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-245 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-145
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.11.3 Port Filter Settings
Procedure 5-49
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. In the Port Filter Setting List tab, then click the Port number of the target port.
Figure 5-246 Filter Setting Window Port Filter Setting List Tab
Ingress Filter Setting option window appears.
4. Select a Profile Index to apply, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-247 Delete Filter Entry Option Window
NOTE: In the Profile Index drop-down list, the listed items excluding
Not Used have been created at the procedure earlier in the
Filter Settings.
Profile List tab
Port Number
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-146 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-248 Information Dialog Box
The Filter Setting window (Port Filter Setting List tab) updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-249 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-147
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.12 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting
Procedure 5-50
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting. The L2CP Transparent/
Mirroring Setting window appears.
3. Click the Port number of the target.
Figure 5-250 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Window
4. L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting option window appears. Specify values to
be set:
Figure 5-251 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Option Window
Port Number
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-148 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel is not supported on the RSTP enabled port.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-252 Information Dialog Box
The L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting window updates the information.
Table 5-41 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port Information
Media Type (read only) Indicates the Media type.
Speed (read only) Indicates the speed.
Monitoring Disable Disables the monitoring function.
Monitoring Sets the port as the monitored port.
Mirror Sets the port as Mirror Port. The traffic of the
monitored port will be duplicated to this port.
Monitoring Direction Ingress Specifies to monitor the ingress traffic of the port.
Egress Specifies to monitor the egress traffic of the port.
Both Specifies to monitor both the ingress and egress
traffics of the port.
L2 Protocol Transparency
Tunnel Enable (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to enables
the PDU of the protocol transparent without
processing.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-149
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-253 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
5.3.13 Port Isolate Setting
Procedure 5-51
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Port Isolate Setting. The Port Isolate Setting window
appears.
3. Click the Port number of the target.
Figure 5-254 Port Isolate Setting Window
Port Number
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-150 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Port Isolate Setting option window appears. Specify values to be set:
Figure 5-255 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-256 Information Dialog Box
The L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-257 Port Isolate Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-42 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Port Isolate Enable Enables the Port Isolate function.
Disable Disables the Port Isolate function.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-151
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.14 LLF Setting
5.3.14.1 Add LLF Group
Procedure 5-52
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add LLF button:
Figure 5-258 LLF Setting Window
LLF Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-259 LLF Setting (Add) Option Window
Add LLF button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-152 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-260 Information Dialog Box
The LLF Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-261 LLF Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-43 LLF Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
LLF GRP ID 1 to 16 Specifies the LLF Group ID Number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available card) Selects the target card.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.
Disable Disables sending the LLF Signals.
Ignore Received LLF Signal Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
(check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set the
port as Edge Port.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-153
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.14.2 Modify LLF Group
Procedure 5-53
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click an LLF GRP ID number of the target LLF:
Figure 5-262 LLF Setting Window
LLF Setting (Modify) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-263 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window
LLF GRP numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-154 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-264 Information Dialog Box
The LLF Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-265 LLF Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-44 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
LLF GRP ID (read only) Indicates the selected LLF GRP ID number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available card) Selects to change the target card.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.
Disable Disables sending the LLF Signals.
Ignore Received LLF Signal Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
(check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set the
port as Edge Port.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-155
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.14.3 Delete LLF Group
Procedure 5-54
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click the Delete LLF GRP button:
Figure 5-266 LLF Setting Window
LLF Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Select the LLF GRP ID number of the target to be removed, then click the OK
button:
Figure 5-267 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete LLF button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-156 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button.
Figure 5-268 Confirmation Dialog box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-269 Information Dialog Box
The LLF Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-270 LLF Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-157
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.3.15 Broadcast Storm Control Setting
Following procedure sets the input rate for the broadcast storm control, and enables/
disable the Broadcast Storm Control per Ethernet port (including MODEM port).
Procedure 5-55
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Broadcast Storm Control Setting. The Broadcast Storm
Control Setting window appears.
3. Click the Broadcast Storm Control Rate.
Figure 5-271 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window
The Broadcast Storm Control Rate option window appears.
Broadcast Storm Control Rate
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-158 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Specify the input rate of the target frames for Broadcast Storm Control, then click
the OK button:
Figure 5-272 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-273 Information Dialog Box
The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information.
6. Click the target port to set the Broadcast Storm Control usage:
Figure 5-274 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window
Broadcast Storm Control option window appears.
Table 5-45 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Broadcast Storm Control Rate 1 to 1000 Mbps Sets the input rate of the frame for the Broadcast
Storm Control. [granularity: 1 Mbps]
Port Number
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-159
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Set Enable or Disable the Broadcast Storm Control by clicking its radio button,
then click the OK button:
Figure 5-275 Broadcast Storm Control Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-276 Information Dialog Box
The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information.
9. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-277 LLF Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-160 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.4 Configure Crossconnection
iPASOLINK supports the crossconnection configured using E1 Ports and STM-1
Ports. The E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting menu provides the following options:
E1 Port Setting
Sets E1 Port by specifying E1 Port Name, E1 CH Usage, Channel Impedance and
unused CH reports.
STM-1 Port Setting
Sets STM-1 Port by specifying STM-1 Port Mode, Usage, TIM ALM and ALS
(Automatic Laser Shutdown).
Cross Connect Setting
Configures the Cross Connect, and confirms the current usage of Cross Connect and
Ports (CH).
5.4.1 E1 Port Setting
Procedure 5-56
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select E1 Port Setting. The E1 Port Setting window
appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Figure 5-278 E1 Port Setting Window
E1 Port Setting option window appears.
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-161
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-279 E1 Port Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 5-46 E1 Port Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Collective Setting: This option sets all ports to the same values. To set ports individually, use the options below
the Collective Setting options.
CH Usage Used All All E1 Channels are set to be used.
Not Used All All E1 Channels are set to be unused.
CH Usage Error Report Report All Allows to report a usage error if an unused E1 CH is detected
at the input signal.
Not Report All Disables to report a usage error for all E1 ports.
Impedance All CH 120 Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 120 ohms.
All CH 75 Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 75 ohms.
CH Usage Used Sets to use the port.
Not Used Sets not to use the port.
CH Usage Error Report Report Enables to report the usage error if detecting an unused port.
Not Report Disables to report a usage error.
Impedance
120
Sets the port impedance to 120 ohms.
75 Sets the port impedance to 75 ohms.
Port Name (text field) Specifies a name to the port. Valid value is at least one, up to
32 characters long.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-162 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-280 Information Dialog Box
The E1 Port Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-281 E1 Port Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-163
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.4.2 STM-1 Port Setting
Procedure 5-57
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select STM-1 Port Setting. The STM-1 Port Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Figure 5-282 STM-1 Port Setting Window
STM-1 Port Setting option window appears. Provided options differ depending
on the STM-1 Mode. STM-1 Modes are Through and Channelized:
Through: The Through Mode transmits the STM-1 over the radio frame.
Channelized: The Channelized Mode extracts the 63 E1 channels from the
STM-1 to use them selectively.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-164 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
STM-1 Mode: Through
Figure 5-283 STM-1 Port Setting (Through Mode) Option Window
Table 5-47 STM-1 Port Setting (Through Mode) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
STM-1 Mode Through Indicates Through for STM-1 Mode.
Port Setting
Port Usage Used Sets to use the STM-1 Port.
Not Used Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.
Port Name (text filed) Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32 characters
long.
MS-AIS Generation Enable Enables the function to stop laser outputs if detecting that STM-
1 signal is lost (optical or radio) (RLOS), and to output MS-AIS.
Disable Disables this function.
ALS Usage Enable Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.
Disable Disables the ALS function.
ALS Interval 60sec Sets the delay time to release the ALS when the alarm is
cleared.
180sec
300sec
STM-1 Switch Setting
Lock-in Usage Used Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying out a
switching operation to prevent frequently executing the
switching.
Not Used Disables this function.
Detection Time [min] 1 to 60 Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a failure and
execution of the switch operation. [unit: minute]
Detection Count [times] 1 to 255 Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over times.
Clear Lock-in Time [min] 1 to 2880 Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in mode.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-165
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
STM-1 Mode: Channelized
Figure 5-284 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode)
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-166 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Table 5-48 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode) Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
STM-1 Mode Channelized Indicates Channelized for STM-1 Mode.
Port Setting
Port Usage Used Sets to use the STM-1 Port.
Not Used Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.
Port Name (text filed) Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32
characters long.
MS-AIS Generation Enable Enables the function to stop laser outputs if detecting
that STM-1 signal is lost (optical or radio) (RLOS), and
to output MS-AIS.
Disable Disables this function.
ALS Usage Enable Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.
Disable Disables the ALS function.
ALS Interval 60sec Sets the delay time to release the ALS when the alarm
is cleared.
180sec
300sec
Trace Setting
Trace Mode J0: Section Trace Enables to detect RS-TIM.
J1: High Order
Path Trace
Enables to detect HP-TIM.
Trace Mismatch AIS
Generation Action
Enable Enables the function to output AIS if detecting TIM.
Disable Disables this function.
Section Trace Send 1 to 15 Sets J 0 in the outgoing direction. Enabled when Trace
Mode is J0: Section Trace.
Expected Section Trace 1 to 15 Sets J 0 in the incoming direction. Enabled when Trace
Mode is J0: Section Trace.
Higher Order Path Trace 1 to 15 Sets J 1 in the outgoing direction. Enabled when Trace
Mode is J1: HIgher Order Path Trace.
Expected Higher Order
Path Trace
1 to 15 Sets J 1 in the incoming direction. Enabled when Trace
Mode is J1: HIgher Order Path Trace.
Received Trace Value
Received Section Trace (read only) Indicates the received Section Trace value.
Received High Order
Path Trace
(read only) Indicates the received Higher-Order Path Trace value.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-167
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-285 Information Dialog Box
The STM-1 Port Setting window updates the information.
Radio Alarm Transfer Setting
Radio Alarm Transfer Enable Enables to transfer an alarm through E1 Channel with
STM-1 is configured as Channelized.
Disable Disables the function.
STM-1 Switch Setting
Lock-in Usage Used Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying
out a switching operation to prevent frequently
executing the switching.
Not Used Disables this function.
Detection Time [min] 1 to 60 Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a
failure and execution of the switch operation. [unit:
minute]
Detection Count [times] 1 to 255 Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over
times.
Clear Lock-in Time [min] 1 to 2880 Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in
mode.
Table 5-48 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode) Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-168 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-286 STM-1 Port Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-169
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.4.3 Cross Connect Setting
iPASOLINK 1000 supports the Cross Connection of 2M E1 and STM-1 (Through
Mode) levels. Up to 168 Cross Connections in total can be created.
Following lists the interface cards that support the Cross Connections:
See the following table for channel numbering of the Channelized STM-1:
Table 5-49 Cross Connect Settings
Card Type Number of
Cards per IDU
Number of
Ports per Card
Description
MODEM-A Up to 12 152
16E1-A Up to 14 16
STM1-A (Channelized Mode) Up to 14 63
STM1-A (Through Mode) Up to 14 1 As one 75xE1 Port.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-170 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Table 5-50 Channel Numbering of Channelized STM-1
STM-1
Channelized
Port No.
TUG-3# TUG-2# TU-12# NEO
Extension
Port No.
STM-1
Channelized
Port No.
TUG-3# TUG-2# TU-12# NEO
Extension
Port No.
#K #L #M #K #L #M
1 1 1 1 1 34 1 5 2 14
2 2 1 1 22 35 2 5 2 35
3 3 1 1 43 36 3 5 2 56
4 1 2 1 4 37 1 6 2 17
5 2 2 1 25 38 2 6 2 38
6 3 2 1 46 39 3 6 2 59
7 1 3 1 7 40 1 7 2 20
8 2 3 1 28 41 2 7 2 41
9 3 3 1 49 42 3 7 2 62
10 1 4 1 10 43 1 1 3 3
11 2 4 1 31 44 2 1 3 24
12 3 4 1 52 45 3 1 3 45
13 1 5 1 13 46 1 2 3 6
14 2 5 1 34 47 2 2 3 27
15 3 5 1 55 48 3 2 3 48
16 1 6 1 16 49 1 3 3 9
17 2 6 1 37 50 2 3 3 30
18 3 6 1 58 51 3 3 3 51
19 1 7 1 19 52 1 4 3 12
20 2 7 1 40 53 2 4 3 33
21 3 7 1 61 54 3 4 3 54
22 1 1 2 2 55 1 5 3 15
23 2 1 2 23 56 2 5 3 36
24 3 1 2 44 57 3 5 3 57
25 1 2 2 5 58 1 6 3 18
26 2 2 2 26 59 2 6 3 39
27 3 2 2 47 60 3 6 3 60
28 1 3 2 8 61 1 7 3 21
29 2 3 2 29 62 2 7 3 42
30 3 3 2 50 63 3 7 3 63
31 1 4 2 11
32 2 4 2 32
33 3 4 2 53
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-171
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.4.3.1 Add Cross Connect Assignment
(1) Non-Protection Mode
Procedure 5-58
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add tool button to create a new Cross Connection:
Figure 5-287 Cross Connect Setting Window
Cross Connect Setting (Add) option window appears.
Add button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-172 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-288 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window
NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel
spacing.
Table 5-51 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Service No. 1 to 168 Enter Service Number of the Cross Connection.
Service Name (text field) Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long. This
field can be left vacant (0 character) as well.
Cross Connect Type E1 Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.
STM-1 (Through) Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.
Edge A
Protection (check box) Do not check (not to leave a tick in) the check box for
Non-Protection setting.
(available port)
Select a port for Edge A.
NOTE
Edge B
Protection (check box) Do not check (not to leave a tick in) the check box for
Non-Protection setting.
(available port)
Select a port for Edge B.
NOTE
AMR Linkage (hyperlink) Verify the channel number and modularization related
to the current assignment.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-173
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-289 Information Dialog Box
The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-290 Cross Connect Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-174 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
(2) Protection Mode
Procedure 5-59
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add tool button to create a new Cross Connection:
Figure 5-291 Cross Connect Setting Window
Cross Connect Setting (Add) option window appears.
Add button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-175
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-292 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window
NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel
spacing.
Table 5-52 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Service No. 1 to 168 Enter Service Number of the Cross Connection.
Service Name (text field) Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long. This
field can be left vacant (0 character) as well.
Cross Connect Type E1 Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.
STM-1 (Through) Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.
Edge A
Protection (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to configure the
Protection. Checking this box enables the option box below.
(available port)
Select a port for Edge A, Term1/Term2.
NOTE
Edge B
Protection (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to configure the
Protection. Checking this box enables the option box below.
(available port)
Select a port for Edge B, Term1/Term2.
NOTE
AMR Linkage (hyperlink) Verify the channel number and modularization related to
the current assignment.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-176 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-293 Information Dialog Box
The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-294 Cross Connect Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
5.4.3.2 Modify (Edit) Cross Connect Assignment
Procedure 5-60
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-177
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3. Click the Service No. of the target Cross Connect.
Figure 5-295 Cross Connect Setting Window
Cross Connect Setting (Modify) option window appears.
4. Modify parameters:
Figure 5-296 Cross Connect Setting (Modify) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Service Numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-178 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-297 Information Dialog Box
The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-298 Cross Connect Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
5.4.3.3 Delete Cross Connect Assignment
Procedure 5-61
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-179
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
3. Click the Delete button:
Figure 5-299 Cross Connect Setting Window
Cross Connect Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box of the target crossconnection:
Figure 5-300 Cross Connect Setting (Delete) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-180 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-301 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed:
Figure 5-302 Information Dialog Box
The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.
8. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-303 Cross Connect Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-181
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.5 Set PWE Function
Following specifies the TDM PWE (SAToP) function:
5.5.1 Add New PWE
Procedure 5-62
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning to select PWE Setting. The
PWE Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add PWE tool button:
Figure 5-304 PWE Setting Window
Step 1 PWE Setting option window appears.
Add PWE button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-182 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Modify parameters:
Figure 5-305 Step 1 PWE Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the Detail Option button. (To change Capsule E1 frame
size / RTP Header addition.)
Table 5-53 Step 1 PWE Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
PWE No. 1 to 256 Assign the service number of PWE.
PWE Service Name (text field) Enter the service name of PWE. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters
long.
MSE E1 CH CH01 to CH64 Select E1 Cross Connect CH.
Jitter Buffer
2 [ms]
Set the J itter Buffer size.
e.g., Select 8 [ms] for 4 ms J itter Buffer.
4 [ms]
8 [ms]
16 [ms]
32 [ms]
64 [ms]
128 [ms]
Clock Mode ACR MSE E1 CH No. 1 to 16. Select TDM synchronization source
clock to transmit.
NE Clock MSE E1 CH No. 1 to 64
Sync E1 MSE E1 CH No. 1 to 64
Assign CH 1 to 16 Enabled when the ACR Slave is selected.
Detail Option button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-183
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Detail Option window appears.
6. Specify/Modify the parameters:
Figure 5-306 Detail Option Window
7. Click the OK button. The Detail Option window disappears.
8. Click the Next button on the Step 1 PWE Setting option window. Step 2 Select
VLAN ID option window appears.
9. Specify/Modify parameters:
Figure 5-307 Step 2 Select VLAN ID Option Window
NOTE: To add VLAN ID, click the Add VLAN ID tool button, then go to
5.3.4 VLAN Setting.
Table 5-54 PWE Detail Option Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Capsule E1 Frame Size 1 to 8
RTP Header On Enables the Option RTP Header addition.
Off Disables the Option RTP Header addition.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-184 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
10. Click the Next button. Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen option window
appears.
11. Confirm the displayed parameters.
Figure 5-308 Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen Option Window
12. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Figure 5-309 Information Dialog Box
The PWE Setting window updates the information.
Table 5-55 PWE Detail Option Parameters
Parameter Value Description
COS 0 to 7 COS valued of PWE.
ECID 1 to 1048575 Specify the ID of PWE.
Destination MAC Address (text field)
ff.ff.ff.ff.ff.ff
Enter the MAC Address of opposing MSE-A (display to
PWE Setting window) or Broadcast Address.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-185
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
13. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-310 PWE Setting (1) Window
Figure 5-311 PWE Setting (2) Window
14. Add Cross connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH (refer to 5.4.3 Cross
Connect Setting).
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-186 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.5.2 Modify PWE
Procedure 5-63
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning to select PWE Setting. The
PWE Setting window appears.
3. Click the PWE No. link of the target object:
Figure 5-312 PWE Setting Window
Step 1 PWE Setting option window appears.
PWE No.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-187
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Modify parameters:
Figure 5-313 Step 1 PWE Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the Next button. Step 2 Select VLAN ID option window
appears.
6. Modify the parameters:
Figure 5-314 Step 2 Select VLAN ID Option Window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-188 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. When completed, click the Next button. Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen
option window appears.
8. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-315 Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen Option Window
9. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-316 Information Dialog Box
The PWE Setting window updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-189
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
10. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-317 PSW Setting (1) Window
Figure 5-318 PSW Setting (2) Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-190 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.5.3 Delete PWE
Procedure 5-64
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning to select PWE Setting. The
PWE Setting window appears.
3. Click the Delete PWE tool button.
Delete PWE option window appears.
4. Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box of the target PWE.
Figure 5-319 Delete PWE Option Window
Delete PWE button
check
box
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-191
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. Click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-320 Confirmation Dialog Box
While in progress, the progress bar appears.
Figure 5-321 Progress Bar
7. When completed, Information dialog box appears.
Figure 5-322 Information Dialog Box
8. The PWE Setting window updates the information.
Figure 5-323 PSW Setting Window
9. Delete Cross connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH. Refer to 5.4.3 Cross
Connect Setting. This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-192 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.6 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization
The procedures here sets the Internal/External Clock and the Timing Source
Selection of the equipment. The EXT Clock Setting menu provides the following
menu:
Equipment Clock Setting
Selects the Clock and Timing Source.
EXT Clock Setting
Sets the CLK Output parameters.
5.6.1 Set Equipment Clock
Procedure 5-65
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Equipment
Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Equipment Clock Setting. The
Equipment Clock Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Figure 5-324 Equipment Clock Setting Window
Equipment Clock Setting option window appears.
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-193
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-325 Equipment Clock Setting Option Window
Table 5-56 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Equipment CLK Mode Master Sets the equipment clock as the Master Clock
to provide timing signals to synchronize Slave
Clocks.
Slave Sets the equipment clock as a Slave Clock to
be synchronized with the Master Clock.
SyncETH Enable Enables the Synchronous Ethernet function.
Disable Disables the Synchronous Ethernet function.
Clock Source Selective
Mode
QL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its quality
level.
PL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its priority
level.
Timing Source 1,
2
No Entry Select a clock source.
Line CLK1/2
GbE Line CLK
E1 Line CLK
Option Line CLK (STM1)
3 No Entry
EXT CLK
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-194 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box.
Figure 5-326 Warning Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
Slot (available slot #) Select a Slot number of the target object.
Port/CH (available port #) Select a Port number of the target that can
extract the clock information.
Priority 1 to 12 Sets the priority of the timing source
manually.
Line SSM Usage Use Sets to use the Line SSM.
Not Used Sets not to use the Line SSM.
Forced SSM Value QL-PRC
QL-SSU-A
QL-SSU-B
QL-SEC
Selects the Primary Reference Clock.
Required when the Line SSM Usage is set to
Not Used:
WTR 0 Sets the Wait to Restore time that is a period
to wait for enabling the timing source when
recovered.
10 sec
20 sec
30 sec
1 min to 15 min (by the minute)
Table 5-56 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Quality Level Quality
Overwrite
SSM Code
QL-PRC HIGH 0010
QL-SSU-A : 0100
QL-SSU-B : 1000
QL-SEC LOW 1011
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-195
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-327 Information Dialog Box
The Equipment Clock Setting window updates the information.
8. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-328 Equipment Clock Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-196 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.6.2 Set EXT Clock
Procedure 5-66
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Equipment
Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Ext Clock Setting. The Ext Clock
Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify tool button:
Figure 5-329 Ext Clock Setting Window
NOTE: Status Information Out EXT CLK2 option box does not appear if no
registration is made to MAIN SLOT2 (Not Used).
Ext Clock Setting option window appears.
Modify button
see NOTE
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-197
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 5-330 Ext Clock Setting Option Window
NOTE: Out EXT CLK2 option box does not appear if no registration is made to
MAIN SLOT2 (Not Used).
see NOTE
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-198 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
NOTE: Port/CH numbers cannot be changed when the same interface is already
used by the equipment clock setting.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-57 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
In/Out
EXT Impedance 120 Selects the impedance of EXT CLK.
75
EXT CLK Interface bps Selects EXT CLK by bit/s or Hertz
Hz
CRC On/Off On Enables the Ext Clock CRC check.
Off Disables the Ext Clock CRC check.
SSM Support Enable Supports SSM.
Disable Disables SSM usage.
Sa Bit Sa4 to Sa8 Sets SSM bit of input/output Ext Clock.
Out
EXT CLK Out SEL NOT SELECT Select a CLK type. Selecting NOT SELECT
disables CLK outputs.
NE CLK
MODEM1
MODEM2
GbE Line CLK
E1 Line CLK
Option Line CLK
Slot (available Slot #) Select a Slot number of the target object.
Port/CH (available Port/CH #) Select a Port or CH number.
Message Pass Through On Enables SSM Message Pass Through mode.
[This option is fixed to On.]
Forced SSM Send Value This option is not supported.
Threshold AIS
Generation Mode
Off This option is not supported.
QL Threshold This option is not supported.
AIS Generation Mode AIS Selects to generate AIS or to shut down the
clock configuration if the output clock source
fails.
Shutdown
Timing Loop Prevention On Enables the timing loop detection.
Off Disables the timing loop detection.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-199
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-331 Information Dialog Box
The Ext Clock Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-332 Equipment Clock Setting Window
NOTE: Out EXT CLK2 option box does not appear if no registration is made to
MAIN SLOT2 (Not Used).
This step ends the procedure.
see NOTE
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-200 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.7 Assign STM-1 (Through) Port for V.11/OW
Use the following procedures to assign the user interface (V.11, RS-232C) and
Orderwire Channel:
V.11/SC Control Setting
Select the input of SC Channel, RS-232C, and V.11 from the SC channel of each
MODEM.
V.11 Directional Setting
Set the working mode of V.11.
OW Setting
Set the Orderwire Channel of the radio section and CALL OUT polarity.
5.7.1 V.11/SC Setting
5.7.1.1 Assign SC Channel Usage
Procedure 5-67
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.
3. Click the SC Channel link:
Figure 5-333 V.11/SC Setting Window
V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) option window appears.
SC Channel
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-201
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and set an SC Channel to the appropriate
port:
Figure 5-334 V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-335 Information Dialog Box
The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-336 Equipment Clock Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Item: MODEM Item: STM1-A
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-202 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.7.1.2 Set for MODEM
Procedure 5-68
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.
3. Click the MODEM link:
Figure 5-337 V.11/SC Setting Window
V.11/SC Setting (MODEM) option window appears.
4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and assign the appropriate usage:
Figure 5-338 V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
MODEM
From MODEM From MODEM to STM1-A
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-203
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-339 Information Dialog Box
The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-340 Equipment Clock Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-204 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.7.1.3 Set for STM1-A
Procedure 5-69
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.
3. Click the STM1-A link:
Figure 5-341 V.11/SC Setting Window
V.11/SC Setting (STM1-A) option window appears.
STM1-A
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-205
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and assign the appropriate usage:
Figure 5-342 V.11/SC Setting (STM1-A) Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-343 Information Dialog Box
The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-206 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-344 V.11/SC Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-207
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.7.2 Assign V.11 Directional Setting
Procedure 5-70
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11 Directional Setting. The V.11 Directional Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Figure 5-345 V.11 Directional Setting Window
V.11 Directional Setting option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate direction:
Figure 5-346 V.11 Directional Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-58 V.11 Directional Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
V.11-1 Direction Setting
V.11-2 Direction Setting
Co-Directional The direction to receive data is the same as
that of the Clock Input/Output.
Contra-Directional The direction to receive data is the opposite to
that of the Clock Input/Output.
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-208 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-347 Information Dialog Box
The V.11 Directional Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-348 V.11 Directional Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-209
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.7.3 Assign Orderwire Setting
5.7.3.1 SW GRP1 (MODEM)
Procedure 5-71
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select OW Setting. The OW Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify link:
Figure 5-349 OW Setting Window
OW Setting (MODEM) option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate usage:
Figure 5-350 OW Setting Option Window
Table 5-59 OW Setting (MODEM) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
OW Use DSC Used Enables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card.
Not Used Disables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card.
MODEM
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-210 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-351 Information Dialog Box
The OW Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-352 OW Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-211
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.7.3.2 AUX-A
Procedure 5-72
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select OW Setting. The OW Setting window appears.
3. Click the AUX-A link:
Figure 5-353 OW Setting Window
OW Setting (AUX-A) option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate polarity:
Figure 5-354 OW Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
Table 5-60 OW Setting (AUX-A) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Call Polarity Invert Calls if a signal is not normal.
Normal Calls when a signal is normal.
AUX-A
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-212 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-355 Information Dialog Box
The OW Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-356 OW Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-213
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.8 Specify Relay Alarm Mappings
By mounting optional card of AUX, iPASOLINK is available to use Alarm input/
output function port for sub-signal of Cluster Alarm and House Keeping.
When Housekeeping input at own station is detected, Cluster Alarm will transmit to
the opposite station by setting up the bit of Cluster ALM input (output toward to
wireless).
When any changes for Cluster ALM output (input toward to wireless) is detected
after Cluster Alarm signal was received by equipment in the opposite station, the
equipment in the opposite station will be set-up bit for House Keeping output control
then Relay output (RL) will be executing.
After receiving a Cluster Alarm signal from the opposite station and another Cluster
Alarm is input (output to the direction of the radio), a setup is performed, Cluster
Alarm signal is sent out to an opposite office. It is possible to transmit the Cluster
Alarm signal.
HK IN 1 to 6 (External input functions, cluster alarm, housekeeping
input ports)
(a) House Keeping Input Port
House Keeping external input port provides six port, four of six ports are used by
both Cluster Alarm and House Keeping and each port is required to select Alarm
function. When an external input port is selected by HKIN, the change of HKIN
is detected then the change is reported to upper level.
(b) Cluster Alarm Input Port
When 1 to 4 external input ports are selected as a Cluster Alarm input, F/W
executes to change the signal of HKIN1-4 into Cluster Alarm signal in wireless
frame then output the signal toward to opposite side of wireless. In addition, any
Modems are available to output the Cluster Alarm input signal.
RL OUT 1 to 6 (External output functions, cluster alarm, house keeping
output ports)
(a) House Keeping Output Port
House Keeping output port provides six port, four of six port are used by both
Cluster Alarm and House Keeping and each port (HK1-4) required to set up
individually from F/W to FPGA.
Set up to OK or not OK for each item (parallel alarm required to set up for each
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-214 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
alarm items), execute port output if over one alarm at specified item is detected.
H/W control output port for other 2 port. (RL1, RL2 port will be fixed for parallel
alarm output by H/W.)
(b) Cluster Alarm Output Port
When House Keeping output ports 1 to 4 are selected as a Cluster Alarm output,
any Cluster Alarm detected from the radio side is outputted to any output port.
Cluster Alarm output 1 to 4 signals are selected after the incoming signals of a
MODEM under redundant system, and the arbitrary Cluster Alarm is output to
the radio port of CH unit.
In Cluster Alarm, it outputs and inputs to two or more MODEM(s) or it has a
through control facility, the signal from MODEM (SW GRP unit) is chosen per
Cluster port, it is possible to MODEM (SW GRP unit) to carry out an output
setup.
Cluster Alarm input and output, and a Through function can be separately
controlled between different ports.
: Initial Setting; : Changeable; : Unable to Set; Enabled to set when AUX-A is registered.
Table 5-61 Port Assignment for Cluster Alarm Setting
Conditions Enabled to set when AUX-A is registered
RL01 RL02 RL03 RL04 RL05 RL06
Maintenance Out MASK MASK MASK MASK
Main Card CPU Alarm Out
Power Supply Out
Remaining Alarms
HK Out 1
HK Out 2
HK Out 3
HK Out 4
Cluster ALM 1 Out
Cluster ALM 2 Out
Cluster ALM 3 Out
Cluster ALM 4 Out
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-215
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.8.1 Relay Control Setting
Procedure 5-73
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Relay-Alarm
Mapping Setting to select Relay Control Setting. The Relay Control Setting
window appears.
3. Click a tab of the target Card, then click the Modify tool button:
Tabs to select Cards appear for the installed Cards only.
Figure 5-357 Relay Control Setting Window (Example: MC-M)
The Relay Control Setting option window appears.
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-216 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Click in the field to select an option.
Selecting Out issues the signal when the event occurs.
A field of the selected item changes to green.
RL03 to RL06 are displayed when the AUX-A Card is registered.
Figure 5-358 Relay Control Setting Option Window (Example: MC-M) (1/2)
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-217
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Figure 5-359 Relay Control Setting Option Window (Example: MC-M) (2/2)
5. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-360 Information Dialog Box
The Relay Contact Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the specified information. Repeat steps to set alarms of other Cards.
This step ends the procedure.
OK button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-218 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.8.2 Cluster Alarm Setting
Procedure 5-74
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Provisioning then expand the Relay-
Alarm Mapping Setting to select Cluster Alarm Setting. The Cluster Alarm
Setting window appears.
2. Click the Modify tool button.
Figure 5-361 Cluster Alarm Setting Window
Cluster Alarm Setting option window appears.
3. Specify the appropriate parameters, the click the OK button
Figure 5-362 Cluster Alarm Setting Option Window
Information dialog box appears.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-219
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Click the OK button.
Figure 5-363 Information Dialog Box
5. The Cluster Alarm Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed parameters.
Figure 5-364 Cluster Alarm Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-220 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.9 Configure Alarm/AIS Setting
Use the following procedures to configure the alarm severity, colors, and the relevant
settings of AIS events.
Correlation Setting
Users can modify the conditions to mask alarms (if displaying/clearing alarms on
LCT or LED).
Alarm Severity Setting
Users can modify the severity level of each alarm, such as critical, major, minor, and
warning, reported by iPASOLINK 1000.
AIS Setting
Users can enable/disable AIS outputs, and specify the conditions if to output AIS and
delay time to output AIS.
BER Threshold Setting
Specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/STM-1 MUX input and E-BER/
SD.
5.9.1 Correlation Settings
Procedure 5-75
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select Correlation Setting. The Correlation Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Figure 5-365 Correlation Setting Window
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-221
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Correlation Setting option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate polarity:
Figure 5-366 Correlation Setting Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-367 Information Dialog Box
The Correlation Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-368 Correlation Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-62 Correlation Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Alarm Correlation On Enables to detect lower level alarms.
Off Disables to detect lower level alarms.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-222 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.9.2 Alarm Severity Setting
Using the following procedure, alarm severity levels can be assigned to conditions
that iPASOLINK has.
Procedure 5-76
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select Alarm Severity Setting. The Alarm Severity Setting window
appears.
3. Click the target object tab to select, and click the Modify tool button:
Figure 5-369
Alarm Severity Setting option window appears.
click a tab
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-223
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
4. Assign the severity level by selecting the level from the Alarm Status drop-down
list, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-370 Alarm Severity Setting Option Window
5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 5-371 Information Dialog Box
The Alarm Severity Setting window updates the information.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-224 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
6. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-372 Alarm Severity Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-225
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.9.3 AIS Setting
Procedure 5-77
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select AIS Setting. The AIS Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Figure 5-373 AIS Setting Window
AIS Setting option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate polarity:
Figure 5-374 AIS Setting Option Window
Table 5-63 AIS Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
AIS Activation Condition LOF + High BER Sends AIS by receiving LOF and High BER alarms.
LOF Sends AIS by receiving LOF signal only.
AIS Generated Report Report Reports the event of generated AIS.
Not Report Not to report the event of generated AIS.
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-226 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-375 Information Dialog Box
The AIS Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-376 AIS Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
AIS Received Report Report Report the event of receiving AIS.
Not Report Not to report the event of receiving AIS.
AIS Received Condition Alarm Treats an event of receiving AIS as an alarm.
Status Treat an event of receiving AIS as no alarm (event).
Table 5-63 AIS Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-227
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.9.4 BER Threshold Setting
Use the following procedures to specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/
STM-1 MUX input and E-BER/SD.
5.9.4.1 Switch Group 1 (MODEM)
Procedure 5-78
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting window
appears.
3. Click the desired MODEM link:
Figure 5-377 BER Threshold Setting Window
BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-378 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Option Window
links to objects option windows
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-228 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-379 Information Dialog Box
The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-380 BER Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-64 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
High BER 1E-3 Specifies the High BER Threshold of MW.
1E-4
1E-5
Low BER 1E-6 Specifies the Low BER Threshold of MW.
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-229
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.9.4.2 STM1-A
Procedure 5-79
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting window
appears.
3. Click the desired STM1-A link:
Figure 5-381 BER Threshold Setting Window
BER Threshold Setting (STM1 A) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-382 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Option Window
Table 5-65 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
RS-EXC 1E-3 Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator
Section Signal Excessive BER condition.
1E-4
1E-5
RS-DEG 1E-6 Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator
Section Signal Degrade condition.
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
links to objects option windows
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-230 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-383 Information Dialog Box
The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-384 BER Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-231
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.10 Assign PMON/RMON Settings
Use the following procedures to set the relevant configuration of PMON (except
Ethernet port) and RMON (Ethernet port), including threshold values.
The PMON/RMON Setting provides the following menus:
PMON Threshold Setting
Threshold setting of PMON (except Ether port).
PMON Other
Threshold setting of TCN level.
RMON Threshold Setting
Threshold setting of RMON (Ether port).
RMON Other
Add the VLAN Counter (VLAN Counter Report).
5.10.1 PMON Threshold Setting
PMON/RMON Threshold values can be set to the following objects:
MODEM: for a slot (Card) that does not configure Switch Group.
SW GRP: for slots (Cards) that configure a Switch Group.
APS GRP
STM1-A
16E1-A
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-232 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.10.1.1 MODEM / SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab
Procedure 5-80
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting
window appears.
3. Click the desired MODEM or SW GRP (for protected slots) tab to select, then
click the Modify tool button.
Figure 5-385 PMON Threshold Setting Window
RF - MODEM or RF - SW GRP option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-386 RF - MODEM Option Window
click a tab
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-233
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Table 5-66 PMON Threshold Setting (MODEM / SW GRP Tab) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
RF BBE 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF OFS 15mintes Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-234 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-387 Information Dialog Box
The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-388 PMON Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-235
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.10.1.2 APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab
Procedure 5-81
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting
window appears.
3. Click the desired STM1-A or APS GRP tab, then Modify DMR RS or Modify RS
tool button.
Figure 5-389 PMON Threshold Setting Window
DMR - APS GRP or RS - APS GRP option window appears.
Modify DMR RS button
click a tab
Modify RS button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-236 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
DMR STM1 A / APS GRP
Figure 5-390 DMR Option Window (example: STM1 A)
Table 5-67 PMON Threshold Setting (DMR - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
DMR RS BBE 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
BBE condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
BBE for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
BBE condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
BBE condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
ES condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
ES for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
ES condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
ES condition for a 1-Day period.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-237
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
DMR RS SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
SES condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
SES for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
SES condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
SES condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
SEP condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
SEP for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
SEP condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
SEP condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
UAS condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
UAS for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
UAS condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
UAS condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS OFS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
OFS condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
OFS for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF
OFS condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF
OFS condition for a 1-Day period.
Table 5-67 PMON Threshold Setting (DMR - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-238 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
RS STM1 A / APS GRP
Figure 5-391 RS Option Window (example: STM1 A)
Table 5-68 PMON Threshold Setting (RS - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
RS BBE-RS 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-239
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
RS SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS OFS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Table 5-68 PMON Threshold Setting (RS - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter Value Description
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-240 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
Figure 5-392 Information Dialog Box
The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-393 PMON Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-241
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.10.1.3 16E1-A (Slot No.) Tab
Procedure 5-82
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting
window appears.
3. Click the desired 16E1-A tab to select, then click the Modify tool button.
Figure 5-394 PMON Threshold Setting Window
E1CV 16E1-A option window appears.
click a tab Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-242 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-395 RF - E1CV 16E1-A Option Window
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-396 Information Dialog Box
The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.
Table 5-69 PMON Threshold Setting (16E1-A) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
15min/1day Occur 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to detect an
alarm condition.
Recover 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to clear the
alarmed condition.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-243
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-397 PMON Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-244 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.10.2 PMON Other
Procedure 5-83
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Other. The PMON Other window appears.
3. Click the target MODEM link:
Figure 5-398 PMON Other Window
PMON Other Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-399 DMR - APS GRP Option Window
Table 5-70 PMON Other Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
RX Level TCN Threshold 99 to 30 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN RX Level
alarm. [unit: dBm]
link to option window
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-245
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-400 Information Dialog Box
The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-401 PMON Other Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-246 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.10.3 RMON Threshold Setting
Procedure 5-84
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Threshold Setting. The RMON Threshold Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Figure 5-402 RMON Threshold Setting Window
RMON Threshold Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-403 RMON Threshold Setting Option Window
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-247
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-404 Information Dialog Box
The RMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.
Table 5-71 RMON Threshold Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
RX Drop Events 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop
Event condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop
Events condition for a 1-day period.
RX Undersize Pkts 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Undersize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Undersize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
RX Fragments 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Fragments condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Fragments condition for a 1-day period.
RX CRC Alignment
Errors
15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC
Alignment Error for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC
Alignment Error for a 1-day period.
RX Oversize Pkts 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Oversize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Oversize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
TX Collisions 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX
collision for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX
collision for a 1-day period.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-248 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-405 RMON Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-249
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.10.4 RMON Other
5.10.4.1 Add VLAN Counter
Procedure 5-85
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Other. The RMON Other window appears.
3. Click the VLAN counter No. on the VLAN Counter Select tab:
Figure 5-406 RMON Threshold Setting Window
RMON Threshold Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-407 VLAN Counter Select Option Window
VLAN Counter numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-250 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-408 Information Dialog Box
The RMON Other window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-409 RMON Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Table 5-72 RMON Threshold Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Item (available card) Select the target card to specify.
Port (available port) Select the target port to specify.
Enable (radio button) Clicking the radio button enables to count the frames that
pass through the selected VLAN.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-251
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.10.4.2 Delete VLAN Counter
Procedure 5-86
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Other. The RMON Other window appears.
3. Click the Delete VLAN Counter button:
Figure 5-410 RMON Threshold Setting Window
The Delete VLAN Counter option window appears.
4. Select a VLAN Counter No. to be removed, then click the OK button:
Figure 5-411 VLAN Counter Select Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete VLAN Counter
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-252 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. Click the OK button of the dialog box.
Figure 5-412 Confirmation Dialog Box
Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-413 Information Dialog Box
The RMON Other window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-414 RMON Threshold Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-253
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5.11 AUX Setting
AUX Setting provides the following menus:
AUX Input Setting
AUX Output Setting
5.11.1 AUX Input Setting
Procedure 5-87
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand AUX Setting
to select AUX Input Setting. The AUX Input Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button of the target Input tab:
Figure 5-415 AUX Input Setting Window
AUX Input Setting option window appears.
Modify button
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-254 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-416 AUX Input Setting Option Window
Table 5-73 AUX Input Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Name (text field) Enter the event name within one to 32 characters
long, which is to be displayed in the Event Log.
Condition Alarm when Event On(Close) Reports an alarm when Event On.
Alarm when Event Off(Open) Reports an alarm when Event Off.
Status Reports the status information instead of an alarm.
Status Strings
Event On (Close) (text field) Enter the event name to be displayed when the event
status changes.
Event Off (Open) (text field)
X.733
Severity Critical Specifies an alarm severity level.
Major
Minor
Warning
Alarm Type (see Table 5-74) Specifies an alarm type name.
Probable Cause (see Table 5-75) Specifies a probable cause of the event.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-255
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
Table 5-74 AUX Input Setting Alarm Types
Parameter Value
X.733 Alarm Type communicationAlarm
qualityOfServiceAlarm
processingErrorAlarm
equipmentAlarm
environmentalAlarm
integrityViolationAlarm
operationalViolationAlarm
physicalViolationAlarm
securityViolationAlarm
timeDomainViolationAlarm
Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (1 of 6)
Parameter Value
X.733 Probable Causes aIS
callSetUpFailure
degradedSignal
farEndReceiverFailure
framingError
lossOfFrame
lossOfPointer
lossOfSignal
payloadTypeMismatch
transmissionError
remoteAlarmInterface
excessiveBER
pathTraceMismatch
unavailable
signalCableMismatch
lossOfMultiFrame
receiveFailure
transmitFailure
modulationFailure
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-256 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
X.733 Probable Causes
(continued)
demodulationFailure
broadcastChannelFailure
connectionEstablishmentError
invalidMessageReceived
localNodeTransmissionError
remoteNodeTransmissionError
routingFailure
backplaneFailure
dataSetProblem
equipmentIdentifierDuplication
externalIFDeviceProblem
lineCardProblem
multiplexerProblem
nEIdentifierDuplication
powerProblem
processorProblem
receiverFailure
replaceableUnitMissing
synchronizationSourceMismatch
terminalProblem
timingProblem
transmitterFailure
trunkCardProblem
replaceableUnitProblem
realTimeClockFailure
antennaFailure
batteryChargingFailure
diskFailure
FrequencyHoppingFailure
iODeviceError
lossOfSynchronisation
lossOfRedundancy
powerSupplyFailure
signalQualityEvaluationFailure
Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (2 of 6)
Parameter Value
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-257
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
X.733 Probable Causes
(continued)
tranceiverFailure
protectionMechanismFailure
protectingResourceFailure
airCompressorFailure
airConditioningFailure
airDryerFailure
batteryDischarging
batteryFailure
commercialPowerFailure
coolingFanFailure
engineFailure
fireDetectorFailure
FuseFailure
generatorFailure
lowBatteryThreshold
pumpFailure
rectifierFailure
rectifierHighVoltage
rectifierLowFVoltage
ventilationsSystemFailure
enclosureDoorOpen
explosiveGas
fire
flood
highHumidity
highTemperature
highWind
iceBuildUp
intrusionDetection
lowFuel
lowHumidity
lowCablePressure
lowTemperature
lowWater
Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (3 of 6)
Parameter Value
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-258 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
X.733 Probable Causes
(continued)
smoke
toxicGas
coolingSystemFailure
externalEquipmentFailure
externalPointFailure
storageCapacityProblem
memoryMismatch
corruptData
outOfCPUCycles
sfwrEnvironmentProblem
sfwrDownloadFailure
lossOfRealTimel
applicationSubsystemFailure
databaseInconsistency
fileError
outOfMemory
softwareError
timeoutExpired
underlayingResourceUnavailable
versionMismatch
bandwidthReduced
congestion
excessiveErrorRate
excessiveResponseTime
excessiveRetransmissionRate
reducedLoggingCapability
systemResourcesOverload
adapterError
applicationSubsystemFailure
bandwidthReducedX733
callEstablishmentError
communicationsProtocolError
communicationsSubsystemFailure
configurationOrCustomizationError
Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (4 of 6)
Parameter Value
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-259
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
X.733 Probable Causes
(continued)
congestionX733
coruptData
corruptData
cpuCycleslimitExceeded
dataSetOrModemError
degradedSignalX733
dteDceInterfaceError
enclosureDoorOpenX733
equipmentVibration
fileErrorX733
direDetected
framingErrorX733
heatingVentCoolingSystemProblem
humidityUnacceptable
inputOutputDeviceError
inputDeviceError
lanError
leakDetected
localNodeTransmissionErrorX733
lossOfFrameX733
lossOfSignalX733
materialSupplyExhausted
multiplexerProblemX733
outOfMemoryX733
outputDeviceError
performanceDegraded
powerProblems
pressureUnacceptable
processorProblems
pumpFailureX733
queueSizeExceeded
receiveFailureX733
receiverFailureX733
remoteNodeTransmissionErrorX733
Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (5 of 6)
Parameter Value
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-260 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
X.733 Probable Causes
(continued)
resourceAtOrNearingCapacity
responseTimeExcessive
retransmissionRateExcessive
softwareErrorX733
softwareProgramAbnormallyTerminated
softwareProgramError
storageCapacityProblemX733
temperatureUnacceptable
thresholdCrossed
timingProblemX733
toxicLeakDetected
transmitFailureX733
transmitterFailure
underlyingResourceUnavailable
versionMismatchX733
authenticationFailure
breachOfConfidentiality
cableTamper
delayedInformation
denialOfService
duplicateInformation
informationMissing
informationModificationDetected
informationOutOfSequence
keyExpired
nonRepudiationFailure
outOfHoursActivity
outOfService
proceduralError
unauthorizedAccessAttempt
unexpectedInformation
other
Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (6 of 6)
Parameter Value
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-261
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-417 Information Dialog Box
The AUX Input Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-418 AUX Input Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-262 PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
5.11.2 AUX Output Setting
Procedure 5-88
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand AUX Setting
to select AUX Output Setting. The AUX Output Setting window appears.
3. Click the target Output number:
Figure 5-419 AUX Output Setting Window
AUX Output Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:
Figure 5-420 AUX Output Setting Option Window
Table 5-76 AUX Output Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Name (text field) Enter the event name within one to 32 characters long.
Condition Event Off(Open) Outputs a control signal when the Event is off.
Event On(Close) Outputs a control signal when the Event is on.
Status Strings
Event On (Close) (text field) Enter the event name.
Event Off (Open) (text field)
Output numbers
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING 5-263
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
Figure 5-421 Information Dialog Box
The AUX Output Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-422 AUX Output Setting Window
This step ends the procedure.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-264/END PROVISIONING
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
This page is intentionally left blank.
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS 6-1
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
6. ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS
ACAP Adjacent Channel Alternate
Polarization
ACCP Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization
ACK Acknowledgement
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALM Alarm
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMR Adaptive Modulation Radio
ANT, Ant. Antenna
APS Automatic Protection Switch
ATT Attenuator
ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control
AU Administrative Unit
AUX Auxiliary
Ave Average
BBE Background Block Error
BER Bit Error Ratio/Rate
BPF Band Pass Filter
BS Base Station
BSC Base Station Controller
BTS Base Transceiver Station
CAPEX Capital Expenditure
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCM Continuity Check Message
CEPT Conference of European Postal &
Telecommunication Administration
CIR Committed Information Rate
CKT, ckt Circuit
CLK Clock
CMF Channel Mismatch Failure
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CNR Carrier Noise Ratio
CONV Converter
CORBA Common Object Request Broker
Architecture
CoS Class of Service
CPU Central Processing Unit
CR Critical
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CS Channel Separation
CTRL Control
CV near and Code Violation
CW Carrier Wave
DA Destination Address
DADE Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer
DB Database
DC Direct Current
DCN Data Communication Network
DEG Degraded
DEI Drop Eligible Indicator
DEM Demodulator
Des (Dest) Destination
DI Data-In
D/I Drop and Insert
DL Download
DM Delay Measurement
DMM Delay Measurement Message
DMR Delay Measurement Reply
DO Data-Out
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
6-2 ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Pointer
DUP Duplexer
DXC Digital Cross Connect
E1 E-carrier level 1
EBS Express Burst Size
EIR Excess Information Rate
EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility
EML Element Management Layer
EMS Element Management System
EOW C Order Wire
EPS ETH-Protection Switch
EQL Equalizer
ERP ETH-Ring Protection Switch
ES Errored Seconds
ETH Ethernet
ETH-CC ETH-Continuity Check function
ETH-LB ETH-Loopback function
ETH-LBM ETH-Loopback Message
ETH-LBR ETH-Loopback Reply
ETH-LT ETH-Link Trace function
ETH-LTM ETH-Link Trace Message
ETH-LTR ETH-Link Trace Reply
ETH-OAM Ethernet Operations, Administration
and Maintenance
ETH-OAM LB ETH-OAM Loopback
ETH-OAM LT ETH-OAM Link Trace
ETH-RDI ETH-Remote Defect Indication
function
ETSI European Telecommunications
Standards Institute
EXC Electrical Cross Connect
E-to-E End-to-End
Fail Failure
F/B Front Back Ratio
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FDB Forwarding Database
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FEBBE Far End Background Block Error
FEES Far End Errored Seconds
FESES Far End Severely Errored Seconds
FEUAS Far End Unavailable Seconds
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
F/W Firmware
GbE, GBE Gigabit Ethernet
3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
GUI Graphical User Interface
H Horizontal
HDB High Density Bipolar
HK Housekeeping
HP HIgher order Path
HYB Hybrid
H/W Hardware
ID Identification
IDU Indoor Unit
IE Internet Explorer
IEC International Electrotechnical
Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers
I/F Interface
IF Intermediate Frequency
IHG iPASOLINK High Grade
IN Input
INTFC Interface
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS 6-3
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
ITU International Telecommunication
Union
ITU-R Radio Communication Sector of ITU
ITU-T Telecommunication Sector of ITU
L2SW Layer 2 Switch
LAN Local Area Network
LB Loopback
LBM Loopback Message
LCD Loss of Cell Delineation
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LDPC Low Density Party Check
LED Light Emitting Diode
Lev. Level
LLF Link Loss Forwarding
LM Loss Measurement
LMM Loss Measurement Message
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
LO Local Oscillator
LOC Loss of Continuity
LOF Loss of Frame
LOM Loss of Multiframe
LOP Loss of Pointer
LO REF Local Reference Signal Loss
LOS Loss of Signal
LP Lower Order Path
LPM Link Performance Monitor
LT Link Trace
LTI Loss of Incoming Timing Input
LTM Link Trace Message
MAC Media Access Control
MAINT Maintenance
MAX Maximum
Mdev Mean Deviation
MD CPU MODEM CPU
MDI Medium Dependent Interface
MDIX Medium Dependent Interface
Crossover
MD4 Message Digest Algorithm 4
MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5
MEG Maintenance Entity Group
MEM Memory
MEP MEG End Point
MIN Minimum
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point
MIX Mixer
MJ Major
MMC Multi Media Card
MME Mobility Management Entity
MMG Mismerge
MN Minor
MOD Modulator
MODEM Modulator Demodulator
MON Monitor
MPX Multiplexer
MS Multiplex Section
MSC Mobile Switching Center
MSDU MAC Service Data Unit
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTPC Manual Transmitter Power Control
MUX Multiplexing Equipment
N/A Not Applicable
NBI Northbound Interface
NE Network Element
NML Network Management Layer
NMS Network Management System
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
6-4 ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS
NWD-118790-04E iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION
OAM Operation Administration and
Maintenance
OCR Occur
Octs Octets
ODU Outdoor Unit
OFS Out of Frame Second
OMT Orthomode Transducer
OPEX Operational Expenditure
OPP Opposite
OPR Operation
OPT Optical
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OSS Operation Support System
OUT Output
OW Orderwire
PA Power Amplifier
PBR Pressurizable Type B, flange profile
square Rectangular
PCP Priority Code Point
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PGM Program
PHY Physical
PIR Peak Information Rate
PJE Pointer J ustification Event
PJE-N Pointer J ustification Event Negative
Stuff
PJE-P Pointer J ustification Event Positive
Stuff
PKG Package
Pkts Packets
PLM Payload Label Mismatch
PMC PASOLINK Management Card
PMON Performance Monitor
PNMSj PASOLINK Network Management
System J ava Version
PPI PDH PHY Interface
ppm parts per million
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPS Path Protection Switch
PQ Priority Queuing
PRM Parameter
PROT Protection
PS Power Supply
RSL Receive Signal Level
PSC Protection Switching Counts
PSD Protection Switching Duration
PWR Power
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QoS Quality of Service
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
RCVR Recover
REF Reference
REM Remote
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RF Radio Frequency
RFS Radio Frequency Systems
RL Relay
RMON Remote Network Monitoring
RNC Radio Network Controller
RPL Ring Protection Link
RS Regenerator Section
RS-232 Recommended Standard 232
RSL Received Signal Level
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RX Receiver
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS 6-5
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
SC Service Channel
SD Space Diversity
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEG Segment
SEP Severely Errored Period
SES Severely Errored Seconds
SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable
SGMI Security Gateway Management
Interface
SMS Synchronous Multiplexing System
SMU Source Measure Unit
SNCP Sub-network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management
Protocol
SP Strict Priority
SPD Speed
SRC Source MAC Address
STAT Status
STD Standard
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SUB Substitute
SW Switch
S/W Software
SWG Switch Group
SYNC Synchronous
TCI Tag Control Information
TCN Threshold Crossing Notification
TDM Time Division Multiplex
TDMoP TDM over Packet
TEMP Temperature; Temporary
TERM Terminal
TF Transmit Fail
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TLV Type Length Value
TM Through Mode
TNC Threaded Neill-Concelman
ToS Type of Service
TPID Tag Protocol Identifier
TQC Total Quality Control
TTL Time to Live
TU Tributary Unit
TX Transmitter
UAE UAS Event
UAS Unavailable Seconds
UL Upload
UNEQ Unequipped
UNEXP Unexpected
Unicast DMR Unicast Delay Measurement Reply
UNM Unexpected MEP
UNP Unexpected Period
USB Universal Serial Bus
V Vertical; Volt
VC Virtual Channel
VLAN Virtual LAN
VP Virtual Path
VPN Virtual Private Network
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WG Waveguide
WR Warning
WRR Weighted Round Robin
WWW World Wide Web
WS Wayside
XCTRL XPIC Control
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
6-6/END ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS
iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION NWD-118790-04E
X-DEM XPIC Demodulator
XFP 10 (X) Gigabit Small Form Factor
Pluggable
XIF XPIC IF
XPD Cross Polarization Discrimination
Ratio
XPIC Cross Polarization Interface
Canceller
XREF XPIC Reference
Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only

S-ar putea să vă placă și